]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blob - gdb/doc/gdb.texinfo
* gdb.texinfo (set print elements): Note that the number of
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / gdb / doc / gdb.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright (c) 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c
4 @c %**start of header
5 @c makeinfo ignores cmds prev to setfilename, so its arg cannot make use
6 @c of @set vars. However, you can override filename with makeinfo -o.
7 @setfilename gdb.info
8 @c
9 @include gdb-config.texi
10 @c
11 @ifset GENERIC
12 @settitle Debugging with @value{GDBN}
13 @end ifset
14 @ifclear GENERIC
15 @settitle Debugging with @value{GDBN} (@value{TARGET})
16 @end ifclear
17 @setchapternewpage odd
18 @c %**end of header
19
20 @iftex
21 @c @smallbook
22 @c @cropmarks
23 @end iftex
24
25 @finalout
26 @syncodeindex ky cp
27
28 @c readline appendices use @vindex
29 @syncodeindex vr cp
30
31 @c ===> NOTE! <==
32 @c Determine the edition number in *three* places by hand:
33 @c 1. First ifinfo section 2. title page 3. top node
34 @c To find the locations, search for !!set
35
36 @c GDB CHANGELOG CONSULTED BETWEEN:
37 @c Fri Oct 11 23:27:06 1991 John Gilmore (gnu at cygnus.com)
38 @c Sat Dec 22 02:51:40 1990 John Gilmore (gnu at cygint)
39
40 @c THIS MANUAL REQUIRES TEXINFO-2 macros and info-makers to format properly.
41
42 @ifinfo
43 @c This is a dir.info fragment to support semi-automated addition of
44 @c manuals to an info tree. zoo@cygnus.com is developing this facility.
45 @format
46 START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
47 * Gdb:: The GNU debugger.
48 END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
49 @end format
50 @end ifinfo
51 @c
52 @c
53 @ifinfo
54 This file documents the GNU debugger @value{GDBN}.
55
56 @c !!set edition, date, version
57 This is Edition 4.09, April 1993,
58 of @cite{Debugging with @value{GDBN}: the GNU Source-Level Debugger}
59 for GDB Version @value{GDBVN}.
60
61 Copyright (C) 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
62
63 Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
64 this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
65 are preserved on all copies.
66
67 @ignore
68 Permission is granted to process this file through TeX and print the
69 results, provided the printed document carries copying permission
70 notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph
71 (this paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual).
72
73 @end ignore
74 Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
75 manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the
76 section entitled ``GNU General Public License'' is included exactly as
77 in the original, and provided that the entire resulting derived work is
78 distributed under the terms of a permission notice identical to this
79 one.
80
81 Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
82 into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions,
83 except that the section entitled ``GNU General Public License'' may be
84 included in a translation approved by the Free Software Foundation
85 instead of in the original English.
86 @end ifinfo
87
88 @titlepage
89 @title Debugging with @value{GDBN}
90 @subtitle The GNU Source-Level Debugger
91 @ifclear GENERIC
92 @subtitle (@value{TARGET})
93 @end ifclear
94 @sp 1
95 @c !!set edition, date, version
96 @subtitle Edition 4.09, for @value{GDBN} version @value{GDBVN}
97 @subtitle April 1993
98 @author by Richard M. Stallman and Roland H. Pesch
99 @page
100 @tex
101 {\parskip=0pt
102 \hfill (Send bugs and comments on @value{GDBN} to bug-gdb\@prep.ai.mit.edu.)\par
103 \hfill {\it Debugging with @value{GDBN}}\par
104 \hfill \TeX{}info \texinfoversion\par
105 \hfill pesch\@cygnus.com\par
106 }
107 @end tex
108
109 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
110 Copyright @copyright{} 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
111
112 Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
113 this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
114 are preserved on all copies.
115
116 Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
117 manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the
118 section entitled ``GNU General Public License'' is included exactly as
119 in the original, and provided that the entire resulting derived work is
120 distributed under the terms of a permission notice identical to this
121 one.
122
123 Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
124 into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions,
125 except that the section entitled ``GNU General Public License'' may be
126 included in a translation approved by the Free Software Foundation
127 instead of in the original English.
128 @end titlepage
129 @page
130
131 @ifinfo
132 @node Top
133 @top Debugging with @value{GDBN}
134
135 This file describes @value{GDBN}, the GNU symbolic debugger.
136
137 @c !!set edition, date, version
138 This is Edition 4.09, April 1993, for GDB Version @value{GDBVN}.
139
140 @menu
141 * Summary:: Summary of @value{GDBN}
142 @ifset NOVEL
143 * New Features:: New features since GDB version 3.5
144 @end ifset
145 @ifclear BARETARGET
146 * Sample Session:: A sample @value{GDBN} session
147 @end ifclear
148
149 * Invocation:: Getting in and out of @value{GDBN}
150 * Commands:: @value{GDBN} commands
151 * Running:: Running programs under @value{GDBN}
152 * Stopping:: Stopping and continuing
153 * Stack:: Examining the stack
154 * Source:: Examining source files
155 * Data:: Examining data
156 @ifclear CONLY
157 * Languages:: Using @value{GDBN} with different languages
158 @end ifclear
159 @ifset CONLY
160 * C:: C language support
161 @end ifset
162 @c remnant makeinfo bug, blank line needed after two end-ifs?
163
164 * Symbols:: Examining the symbol table
165 * Altering:: Altering execution
166 * GDB Files:: @value{GDBN} files
167 * Targets:: Specifying a debugging target
168 * Controlling GDB:: Controlling @value{GDBN}
169 * Sequences:: Canned sequences of commands
170 @ifclear DOSHOST
171 * Emacs:: Using @value{GDBN} under GNU Emacs
172 @end ifclear
173
174 * GDB Bugs:: Reporting bugs in @value{GDBN}
175 * Command Line Editing:: Facilities of the readline library
176 * Using History Interactively::
177 @ifset NOVEL
178 * Renamed Commands::
179 @end ifset
180 @ifclear PRECONFIGURED
181 * Formatting Documentation:: How to format and print GDB documentation
182 * Installing GDB:: Installing GDB
183 @end ifclear
184 @ifclear AGGLOMERATION
185 * Copying:: GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
186 @end ifclear
187
188 * Index:: Index
189 @end menu
190 @end ifinfo
191
192 @node Summary
193 @unnumbered Summary of @value{GDBN}
194
195 The purpose of a debugger such as @value{GDBN} is to allow you to see what is
196 going on ``inside'' another program while it executes---or what another
197 program was doing at the moment it crashed.
198
199 @value{GDBN} can do four main kinds of things (plus other things in support of
200 these) to help you catch bugs in the act:
201
202 @itemize @bullet
203 @item
204 Start your program, specifying anything that might affect its behavior.
205
206 @item
207 Make your program stop on specified conditions.
208
209 @item
210 Examine what has happened, when your program has stopped.
211
212 @item
213 Change things in your program, so you can experiment with correcting the
214 effects of one bug and go on to learn about another.
215 @end itemize
216
217 @ifclear CONLY
218 You can use @value{GDBN} to debug programs written in C, C++, and Modula-2.
219 Fortran support will be added when a GNU Fortran compiler is ready.
220 @end ifclear
221
222 @menu
223 * Free Software:: Freely redistributable software
224 * Contributors:: Contributors to GDB
225 @end menu
226
227 @node Free Software
228 @unnumberedsec Free software
229
230 @value{GDBN} is @dfn{free software}, protected by the GNU General Public License
231 (GPL). The GPL gives you the freedom to copy or adapt a licensed
232 program---but every person getting a copy also gets with it the
233 freedom to modify that copy (which means that they must get access to
234 the source code), and the freedom to distribute further copies.
235 Typical software companies use copyrights to limit your freedoms; the
236 Free Software Foundation uses the GPL to preserve these freedoms.
237
238 Fundamentally, the General Public License is a license which says that
239 you have these freedoms and that you cannot take these freedoms away
240 from anyone else.
241
242 @ifclear AGGLOMERATION
243 For full details, @pxref{Copying, ,GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE}.
244 @end ifclear
245
246 @node Contributors
247 @unnumberedsec Contributors to GDB
248
249 Richard Stallman was the original author of GDB, and of many other GNU
250 programs. Many others have contributed to its development. This
251 section attempts to credit major contributors. One of the virtues of
252 free software is that everyone is free to contribute to it; with
253 regret, we cannot actually acknowledge everyone here. The file
254 @file{ChangeLog} in the GDB distribution approximates a blow-by-blow
255 account.
256
257 Changes much prior to version 2.0 are lost in the mists of time.
258
259 @quotation
260 @emph{Plea:} Additions to this section are particularly welcome. If you
261 or your friends (or enemies, to be evenhanded) have been unfairly
262 omitted from this list, we would like to add your names!
263 @end quotation
264
265 So that they may not regard their long labor as thankless, we
266 particularly thank those who shepherded GDB through major releases: Stu
267 Grossman and John Gilmore (releases 4.8, 4.7, 4.6, 4.5, 4.4), John Gilmore
268 (releases 4.3, 4.2, 4.1, 4.0, and 3.9); Jim Kingdon (releases 3.5, 3.4,
269 3.3); and Randy Smith (releases 3.2, 3.1, 3.0). As major maintainer of
270 GDB for some period, each contributed significantly to the structure,
271 stability, and capabilities of the entire debugger.
272
273 Richard Stallman, assisted at various times by Pete TerMaat, Chris
274 Hanson, and Richard Mlynarik, handled releases through 2.8.
275
276 @ifclear CONLY
277 Michael Tiemann is the author of most of the GNU C++ support in GDB,
278 with significant additional contributions from Per Bothner. James
279 Clark wrote the GNU C++ demangler. Early work on C++ was by Peter
280 TerMaat (who also did much general update work leading to release 3.0).
281 @end ifclear
282
283 GDB 4 uses the BFD subroutine library to examine multiple
284 object-file formats; BFD was a joint project of David V.
285 Henkel-Wallace, Rich Pixley, Steve Chamberlain, and John Gilmore.
286
287 David Johnson wrote the original COFF support; Pace Willison did
288 the original support for encapsulated COFF.
289
290 Adam de Boor and Bradley Davis contributed the ISI Optimum V support.
291 Per Bothner, Noboyuki Hikichi, and Alessandro Forin contributed MIPS
292 support. Jean-Daniel Fekete contributed Sun 386i support. Chris
293 Hanson improved the HP9000 support. Noboyuki Hikichi and Tomoyuki
294 Hasei contributed Sony/News OS 3 support. David Johnson contributed
295 Encore Umax support. Jyrki Kuoppala contributed Altos 3068 support.
296 Keith Packard contributed NS32K support. Doug Rabson contributed
297 Acorn Risc Machine support. Chris Smith contributed Convex support
298 (and Fortran debugging). Jonathan Stone contributed Pyramid support.
299 Michael Tiemann contributed SPARC support. Tim Tucker contributed
300 support for the Gould NP1 and Gould Powernode. Pace Willison
301 contributed Intel 386 support. Jay Vosburgh contributed Symmetry
302 support.
303
304 Rich Schaefer and Peter Schauer helped with support of SunOS shared
305 libraries.
306
307 Jay Fenlason and Roland McGrath ensured that GDB and GAS agree about
308 several machine instruction sets.
309
310 Patrick Duval, Ted Goldstein, Vikram Koka and Glenn Engel helped
311 develop remote debugging. Intel Corporation and Wind River Systems
312 contributed remote debugging modules for their products.
313
314 Brian Fox is the author of the readline libraries providing
315 command-line editing and command history.
316
317 Andrew Beers of SUNY Buffalo wrote the language-switching code and
318 the Modula-2 support, and contributed the Languages chapter of this
319 manual.
320
321 Fred Fish wrote most of the support for Unix System Vr4.
322 @ifclear CONLY
323 He also enhanced the command-completion support to cover C++ overloaded
324 symbols.
325 @end ifclear
326
327 Hitachi America, Ltd. sponsored the support for Hitachi microprocessors.
328
329 @ifset NOVEL
330 @node New Features
331 @unnumbered New Features since GDB Version 3.5
332
333 @table @emph
334 @item Targets
335 Using the new command @code{target}, you can select at runtime whether
336 you are debugging local files, local processes, standalone systems over
337 a serial port, realtime systems over a TCP/IP connection, etc. The
338 command @code{load} can download programs into a remote system. Serial
339 stubs are available for Motorola 680x0, Intel 80386, and Sparc remote
340 systems; GDB also supports debugging realtime processes running under
341 VxWorks, using SunRPC Remote Procedure Calls over TCP/IP to talk to a
342 debugger stub on the target system. Internally, GDB now uses a function
343 vector to mediate access to different targets; if you need to add your
344 own support for a remote protocol, this makes it much easier.
345
346 @item Watchpoints
347 GDB now sports watchpoints as well as breakpoints. You can use a
348 watchpoint to stop execution whenever the value of an expression
349 changes, without having to predict a particular place in your program
350 where this may happen.
351
352 @item Wide Output
353 Commands that issue wide output now insert newlines at places designed
354 to make the output more readable.
355
356 @item Object Code Formats
357 GDB uses a new library called the Binary File Descriptor (BFD)
358 Library to permit it to switch dynamically, without reconfiguration or
359 recompilation, between different object-file formats. Formats currently
360 supported are COFF, a.out, and the Intel 960 b.out; files may be read as
361 .o files, archive libraries, or core dumps. BFD is available as a
362 subroutine library so that other programs may take advantage of it, and
363 the other GNU binary utilities are being converted to use it.
364
365 @item Configuration and Ports
366 Compile-time configuration (to select a particular architecture and
367 operating system) is much easier. The script @code{configure} now
368 allows you to configure GDB as either a native debugger or a
369 cross-debugger. @xref{Installing GDB}, for details on how to
370 configure.
371
372 @item Interaction
373 The user interface to the GDB control variables is simpler,
374 and is consolidated in two commands, @code{set} and @code{show}. Output
375 lines are now broken at readable places, rather than overflowing onto
376 the next line. You can suppress output of machine-level addresses,
377 displaying only source language information.
378
379 @item C++
380 GDB now supports C++ multiple inheritance (if used with a GCC
381 version 2 compiler), and also has limited support for C++ exception
382 handling, with the commands @code{catch} and @code{info catch}: GDB
383 can break when an exception is raised, before the stack is peeled back
384 to the exception handler's context.
385
386 @item Modula-2
387 GDB now has preliminary support for the GNU Modula-2 compiler, currently
388 under development at the State University of New York at Buffalo.
389 Coordinated development of both GDB and the GNU Modula-2 compiler will
390 continue. Other Modula-2 compilers are currently not supported, and
391 attempting to debug programs compiled with them will likely result in an
392 error as the symbol table of the executable is read in.
393
394 @item Command Rationalization
395 Many GDB commands have been renamed to make them easier to remember
396 and use. In particular, the subcommands of @code{info} and
397 @code{show}/@code{set} are grouped to make the former refer to the state
398 of your program, and the latter refer to the state of GDB itself.
399 @xref{Renamed Commands}, for details on what commands were renamed.
400
401 @item Shared Libraries
402 GDB 4 can debug programs and core files that use SunOS, SVR4, or IBM RS/6000
403 shared libraries.
404
405 @item Reference Card
406 GDB 4 has a reference card. @xref{Formatting Documentation,,Formatting
407 the Documentation}, for instructions about how to print it.
408
409 @item Work in Progress
410 Kernel debugging for BSD and Mach systems; Tahoe and HPPA architecture
411 support.
412 @end table
413 @end ifset
414
415 @ifclear BARETARGET
416 @node Sample Session
417 @chapter A Sample @value{GDBN} Session
418
419 You can use this manual at your leisure to read all about @value{GDBN}.
420 However, a handful of commands are enough to get started using the
421 debugger. This chapter illustrates those commands.
422
423 @iftex
424 In this sample session, we emphasize user input like this: @b{input},
425 to make it easier to pick out from the surrounding output.
426 @end iftex
427
428 @c FIXME: this example may not be appropriate for some configs, where
429 @c FIXME...primary interest is in remote use.
430
431 One of the preliminary versions of GNU @code{m4} (a generic macro
432 processor) exhibits the following bug: sometimes, when we change its
433 quote strings from the default, the commands used to capture one macro
434 definition within another stop working. In the following short @code{m4}
435 session, we define a macro @code{foo} which expands to @code{0000}; we
436 then use the @code{m4} built-in @code{defn} to define @code{bar} as the
437 same thing. However, when we change the open quote string to
438 @code{<QUOTE>} and the close quote string to @code{<UNQUOTE>}, the same
439 procedure fails to define a new synonym @code{baz}:
440
441 @smallexample
442 $ @b{cd gnu/m4}
443 $ @b{./m4}
444 @b{define(foo,0000)}
445
446 @b{foo}
447 0000
448 @b{define(bar,defn(`foo'))}
449
450 @b{bar}
451 0000
452 @b{changequote(<QUOTE>,<UNQUOTE>)}
453
454 @b{define(baz,defn(<QUOTE>foo<UNQUOTE>))}
455 @b{baz}
456 @b{C-d}
457 m4: End of input: 0: fatal error: EOF in string
458 @end smallexample
459
460 @noindent
461 Let us use @value{GDBN} to try to see what is going on.
462
463 @smallexample
464 $ @b{@value{GDBP} m4}
465 @c FIXME: this falsifies the exact text played out, to permit smallbook
466 @c FIXME... format to come out better.
467 GDB is free software and you are welcome to distribute copies
468 of it under certain conditions; type "show copying" to see
469 the conditions.
470 There is absolutely no warranty for GDB; type "show warranty"
471 for details.
472 GDB @value{GDBVN}, Copyright 1993 Free Software Foundation, Inc...
473 (@value{GDBP})
474 @end smallexample
475
476 @noindent
477 @value{GDBN} reads only enough symbol data to know where to find the rest when
478 needed; as a result, the first prompt comes up very quickly. We now
479 tell @value{GDBN} to use a narrower display width than usual, so that examples
480 will fit in this manual.
481
482 @smallexample
483 (@value{GDBP}) @b{set width 70}
484 @end smallexample
485
486 @noindent
487 We need to see how the @code{m4} built-in @code{changequote} works.
488 Having looked at the source, we know the relevant subroutine is
489 @code{m4_changequote}, so we set a breakpoint there with the @value{GDBN}
490 @code{break} command.
491
492 @smallexample
493 (@value{GDBP}) @b{break m4_changequote}
494 Breakpoint 1 at 0x62f4: file builtin.c, line 879.
495 @end smallexample
496
497 @noindent
498 Using the @code{run} command, we start @code{m4} running under @value{GDBN}
499 control; as long as control does not reach the @code{m4_changequote}
500 subroutine, the program runs as usual:
501
502 @smallexample
503 (@value{GDBP}) @b{run}
504 Starting program: /work/Editorial/gdb/gnu/m4/m4
505 @b{define(foo,0000)}
506
507 @b{foo}
508 0000
509 @end smallexample
510
511 @noindent
512 To trigger the breakpoint, we call @code{changequote}. @value{GDBN}
513 suspends execution of @code{m4}, displaying information about the
514 context where it stops.
515
516 @smallexample
517 @b{changequote(<QUOTE>,<UNQUOTE>)}
518
519 Breakpoint 1, m4_changequote (argc=3, argv=0x33c70)
520 at builtin.c:879
521 879 if (bad_argc(TOKEN_DATA_TEXT(argv[0]),argc,1,3))
522 @end smallexample
523
524 @noindent
525 Now we use the command @code{n} (@code{next}) to advance execution to
526 the next line of the current function.
527
528 @smallexample
529 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
530 882 set_quotes((argc >= 2) ? TOKEN_DATA_TEXT(argv[1])\
531 : nil,
532 @end smallexample
533
534 @noindent
535 @code{set_quotes} looks like a promising subroutine. We can go into it
536 by using the command @code{s} (@code{step}) instead of @code{next}.
537 @code{step} goes to the next line to be executed in @emph{any}
538 subroutine, so it steps into @code{set_quotes}.
539
540 @smallexample
541 (@value{GDBP}) @b{s}
542 set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<QUOTE>", rq=0x34c88 "<UNQUOTE>")
543 at input.c:530
544 530 if (lquote != def_lquote)
545 @end smallexample
546
547 @noindent
548 The display that shows the subroutine where @code{m4} is now
549 suspended (and its arguments) is called a stack frame display. It
550 shows a summary of the stack. We can use the @code{backtrace}
551 command (which can also be spelled @code{bt}), to see where we are
552 in the stack as a whole: the @code{backtrace} command displays a
553 stack frame for each active subroutine.
554
555 @smallexample
556 (@value{GDBP}) @b{bt}
557 #0 set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<QUOTE>", rq=0x34c88 "<UNQUOTE>")
558 at input.c:530
559 #1 0x6344 in m4_changequote (argc=3, argv=0x33c70)
560 at builtin.c:882
561 #2 0x8174 in expand_macro (sym=0x33320) at macro.c:242
562 #3 0x7a88 in expand_token (obs=0x0, t=209696, td=0xf7fffa30)
563 at macro.c:71
564 #4 0x79dc in expand_input () at macro.c:40
565 #5 0x2930 in main (argc=0, argv=0xf7fffb20) at m4.c:195
566 @end smallexample
567
568 @noindent
569 We will step through a few more lines to see what happens. The first two
570 times, we can use @samp{s}; the next two times we use @code{n} to avoid
571 falling into the @code{xstrdup} subroutine.
572
573 @smallexample
574 (@value{GDBP}) @b{s}
575 0x3b5c 532 if (rquote != def_rquote)
576 (@value{GDBP}) @b{s}
577 0x3b80 535 lquote = (lq == nil || *lq == '\0') ? \
578 def_lquote : xstrdup(lq);
579 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
580 536 rquote = (rq == nil || *rq == '\0') ? def_rquote\
581 : xstrdup(rq);
582 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
583 538 len_lquote = strlen(rquote);
584 @end smallexample
585
586 @noindent
587 The last line displayed looks a little odd; we can examine the variables
588 @code{lquote} and @code{rquote} to see if they are in fact the new left
589 and right quotes we specified. We use the command @code{p}
590 (@code{print}) to see their values.
591
592 @smallexample
593 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p lquote}
594 $1 = 0x35d40 "<QUOTE>"
595 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p rquote}
596 $2 = 0x35d50 "<UNQUOTE>"
597 @end smallexample
598
599 @noindent
600 @code{lquote} and @code{rquote} are indeed the new left and right quotes.
601 To look at some context, we can display ten lines of source
602 surrounding the current line with the @code{l} (@code{list}) command.
603
604 @smallexample
605 (@value{GDBP}) @b{l}
606 533 xfree(rquote);
607 534
608 535 lquote = (lq == nil || *lq == '\0') ? def_lquote\
609 : xstrdup (lq);
610 536 rquote = (rq == nil || *rq == '\0') ? def_rquote\
611 : xstrdup (rq);
612 537
613 538 len_lquote = strlen(rquote);
614 539 len_rquote = strlen(lquote);
615 540 @}
616 541
617 542 void
618 @end smallexample
619
620 @noindent
621 Let us step past the two lines that set @code{len_lquote} and
622 @code{len_rquote}, and then examine the values of those variables.
623
624 @smallexample
625 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
626 539 len_rquote = strlen(lquote);
627 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
628 540 @}
629 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_lquote}
630 $3 = 9
631 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_rquote}
632 $4 = 7
633 @end smallexample
634
635 @noindent
636 That certainly looks wrong, assuming @code{len_lquote} and
637 @code{len_rquote} are meant to be the lengths of @code{lquote} and
638 @code{rquote} respectively. We can set them to better values using
639 the @code{p} command, since it can print the value of
640 any expression---and that expression can include subroutine calls and
641 assignments.
642
643 @smallexample
644 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_lquote=strlen(lquote)}
645 $5 = 7
646 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_rquote=strlen(rquote)}
647 $6 = 9
648 @end smallexample
649
650 @noindent
651 Is that enough to fix the problem of using the new quotes with the
652 @code{m4} built-in @code{defn}? We can allow @code{m4} to continue
653 executing with the @code{c} (@code{continue}) command, and then try the
654 example that caused trouble initially:
655
656 @smallexample
657 (@value{GDBP}) @b{c}
658 Continuing.
659
660 @b{define(baz,defn(<QUOTE>foo<UNQUOTE>))}
661
662 baz
663 0000
664 @end smallexample
665
666 @noindent
667 Success! The new quotes now work just as well as the default ones. The
668 problem seems to have been just the two typos defining the wrong
669 lengths. We allow @code{m4} exit by giving it an EOF as input:
670
671 @smallexample
672 @b{C-d}
673 Program exited normally.
674 @end smallexample
675
676 @noindent
677 The message @samp{Program exited normally.} is from @value{GDBN}; it
678 indicates @code{m4} has finished executing. We can end our @value{GDBN}
679 session with the @value{GDBN} @code{quit} command.
680
681 @smallexample
682 (@value{GDBP}) @b{quit}
683 @end smallexample
684 @end ifclear
685
686 @node Invocation
687 @chapter Getting In and Out of @value{GDBN}
688
689 This chapter discusses how to start @value{GDBN}, and how to get out of it.
690 (The essentials: type @samp{@value{GDBP}} to start GDB, and type @kbd{quit}
691 or @kbd{C-d} to exit.)
692
693 @menu
694 * Invoking GDB:: How to start @value{GDBN}
695 * Quitting GDB:: How to quit @value{GDBN}
696 * Shell Commands:: How to use shell commands inside @value{GDBN}
697 @end menu
698
699 @node Invoking GDB
700 @section Invoking @value{GDBN}
701
702 @ifset H8EXCLUSIVE
703 For details on starting up @value{GDBP} as a
704 remote debugger attached to a Hitachi microprocessor, see @ref{Hitachi
705 Remote,,@value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors}.
706 @end ifset
707
708 Invoke @value{GDBN} by running the program @code{@value{GDBP}}. Once started,
709 @value{GDBN} reads commands from the terminal until you tell it to exit.
710
711 You can also run @code{@value{GDBP}} with a variety of arguments and options,
712 to specify more of your debugging environment at the outset.
713
714 @ifset GENERIC
715 The command-line options described here are designed
716 to cover a variety of situations; in some environments, some of these
717 options may effectively be unavailable.
718 @end ifset
719
720 The most usual way to start @value{GDBN} is with one argument,
721 specifying an executable program:
722
723 @example
724 @value{GDBP} @var{program}
725 @end example
726
727 @ifclear BARETARGET
728 @noindent
729 You can also start with both an executable program and a core file
730 specified:
731
732 @example
733 @value{GDBP} @var{program} @var{core}
734 @end example
735
736 You can, instead, specify a process ID as a second argument, if you want
737 to debug a running process:
738
739 @example
740 @value{GDBP} @var{program} 1234
741 @end example
742
743 @noindent
744 would attach @value{GDBN} to process @code{1234} (unless you also have a file
745 named @file{1234}; @value{GDBN} does check for a core file first).
746
747 Taking advantage of the second command-line argument requires a fairly
748 complete operating system; when you use @value{GDBN} as a remote debugger
749 attached to a bare board, there may not be any notion of ``process'',
750 and there is often no way to get a core dump.
751 @end ifclear
752
753 @noindent
754 You can further control how @value{GDBN} starts up by using command-line
755 options. @value{GDBN} itself can remind you of the options available.
756
757 @noindent
758 Type
759
760 @example
761 @value{GDBP} -help
762 @end example
763
764 @noindent
765 to display all available options and briefly describe their use
766 (@samp{@value{GDBP} -h} is a shorter equivalent).
767
768 All options and command line arguments you give are processed
769 in sequential order. The order makes a difference when the
770 @samp{-x} option is used.
771
772
773 @menu
774 @ifclear GENERIC
775 @ifset REMOTESTUB
776 * Remote Serial:: @value{GDBN} remote serial protocol
777 @end ifset
778 @ifset I960
779 * i960-Nindy Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a remote i960 (Nindy)
780 @end ifset
781 @ifset AMD29K
782 * UDI29K Remote:: @value{GDBN} and the UDI protocol for AMD29K
783 * EB29K Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a remote EB29K
784 @end ifset
785 @ifset VXWORKS
786 * VxWorks Remote:: @value{GDBN} and VxWorks
787 @end ifset
788 @ifset ST2000
789 * ST2000 Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a Tandem ST2000
790 @end ifset
791 @ifset H8
792 * Hitachi Remote:: @value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors
793 @end ifset
794 @ifset MIPS
795 * MIPS Remote:: @value{GDBN} and MIPS boards
796 @end ifset
797 @ifset SIMS
798 * Simulator:: Simulated CPU target
799 @end ifset
800 @end ifclear
801 @c remnant makeinfo bug requires this blank line after *two* end-ifblahs:
802
803 * File Options:: Choosing files
804 * Mode Options:: Choosing modes
805 @end menu
806
807 @ifclear GENERIC
808 @include gdbinv-s.texi
809 @end ifclear
810
811 @node File Options
812 @subsection Choosing files
813
814 @ifclear BARETARGET
815 When @value{GDBN} starts, it reads any arguments other than options as
816 specifying an executable file and core file (or process ID). This is
817 the same as if the arguments were specified by the @samp{-se} and
818 @samp{-c} options respectively. (@value{GDBN} reads the first argument
819 that does not have an associated option flag as equivalent to the
820 @samp{-se} option followed by that argument; and the second argument
821 that does not have an associated option flag, if any, as equivalent to
822 the @samp{-c} option followed by that argument.)
823 @end ifclear
824 @ifset BARETARGET
825 When @value{GDBN} starts, it reads any argument other than options as
826 specifying an executable file. This is the same as if the argument was
827 specified by the @samp{-se} option.
828 @end ifset
829
830 Many options have both long and short forms; both are shown in the
831 following list. @value{GDBN} also recognizes the long forms if you truncate
832 them, so long as enough of the option is present to be unambiguous.
833 (If you prefer, you can flag option arguments with @samp{--} rather
834 than @samp{-}, though we illustrate the more usual convention.)
835
836 @table @code
837 @item -symbols=@var{file}
838 @itemx -s @var{file}
839 Read symbol table from file @var{file}.
840
841 @item -exec=@var{file}
842 @itemx -e @var{file}
843 Use file @var{file} as the executable file to execute when
844 @ifset BARETARGET
845 appropriate.
846 @end ifset
847 @ifclear BARETARGET
848 appropriate, and for examining pure data in conjunction with a core
849 dump.
850 @end ifclear
851
852 @item -se=@var{file}
853 Read symbol table from file @var{file} and use it as the executable
854 file.
855
856 @ifclear BARETARGET
857 @item -core=@var{file}
858 @itemx -c @var{file}
859 Use file @var{file} as a core dump to examine.
860 @end ifclear
861
862 @item -command=@var{file}
863 @itemx -x @var{file}
864 Execute @value{GDBN} commands from file @var{file}. @xref{Command
865 Files,, Command files}.
866
867 @item -directory=@var{directory}
868 @itemx -d @var{directory}
869 Add @var{directory} to the path to search for source files.
870
871 @ifclear BARETARGET
872 @item -m
873 @itemx -mapped
874 @emph{Warning: this option depends on operating system facilities that are not
875 supported on all systems.}@*
876 If memory-mapped files are available on your system through the @code{mmap}
877 system call, you can use this option
878 to have @value{GDBN} write the symbols from your
879 program into a reusable file in the current directory. If the program you are debugging is
880 called @file{/tmp/fred}, the mapped symbol file will be @file{./fred.syms}.
881 Future @value{GDBN} debugging sessions will notice the presence of this file,
882 and will quickly map in symbol information from it, rather than reading
883 the symbol table from the executable program.
884
885 @c FIXME! Really host, not target?
886 The @file{.syms} file is specific to the host machine where @value{GDBN}
887 is run. It holds an exact image of the internal @value{GDBN} symbol
888 table. It cannot be shared across multiple host platforms.
889 @end ifclear
890
891 @item -r
892 @itemx -readnow
893 Read each symbol file's entire symbol table immediately, rather than
894 the default, which is to read it incrementally as it is needed.
895 This makes startup slower, but makes future operations faster.
896 @end table
897
898 @ifclear BARETARGET
899 The @code{-mapped} and @code{-readnow} options are typically combined in
900 order to build a @file{.syms} file that contains complete symbol
901 information. (@xref{Files,,Commands to specify files}, for information
902 on @file{.syms} files.) A simple GDB invocation to do nothing but build
903 a @file{.syms} file for future use is:
904
905 @example
906 gdb -batch -nx -mapped -readnow programname
907 @end example
908 @end ifclear
909
910 @node Mode Options
911 @subsection Choosing modes
912
913 You can run @value{GDBN} in various alternative modes---for example, in
914 batch mode or quiet mode.
915
916 @table @code
917 @item -nx
918 @itemx -n
919 Do not execute commands from any @file{@value{GDBINIT}} initialization files.
920 Normally, the commands in these files are executed after all the
921 command options and arguments have been processed.
922 @xref{Command Files,,Command files}.
923
924 @item -quiet
925 @itemx -q
926 ``Quiet''. Do not print the introductory and copyright messages. These
927 messages are also suppressed in batch mode.
928
929 @item -batch
930 Run in batch mode. Exit with status @code{0} after processing all the command
931 files specified with @samp{-x} (and @file{@value{GDBINIT}}, if not inhibited).
932 Exit with nonzero status if an error occurs in executing the @value{GDBN}
933 commands in the command files.
934
935 Batch mode may be useful for running @value{GDBN} as a filter, for example to
936 download and run a program on another computer; in order to make this
937 more useful, the message
938
939 @example
940 Program exited normally.
941 @end example
942
943 @noindent
944 (which is ordinarily issued whenever a program running under @value{GDBN} control
945 terminates) is not issued when running in batch mode.
946
947 @item -cd=@var{directory}
948 Run @value{GDBN} using @var{directory} as its working directory,
949 instead of the current directory.
950
951 @ifset LUCID
952 @item -context @var{authentication}
953 When the Energize programming system starts up @value{GDBN}, it uses this
954 option to trigger an alternate mode of interaction.
955 @var{authentication} is a pair of numeric codes that identify @value{GDBN}
956 as a client in the Energize environment. Avoid this option when you run
957 @value{GDBN} directly from the command line. See @ref{Energize,,Using
958 @value{GDBN} with Energize} for more discussion of using @value{GDBN} with Energize.
959 @end ifset
960
961 @ifclear DOSHOST
962 @item -fullname
963 @itemx -f
964 Emacs sets this option when it runs @value{GDBN} as a subprocess. It tells @value{GDBN}
965 to output the full file name and line number in a standard,
966 recognizable fashion each time a stack frame is displayed (which
967 includes each time your program stops). This recognizable format looks
968 like two @samp{\032} characters, followed by the file name, line number
969 and character position separated by colons, and a newline. The
970 Emacs-to-@value{GDBN} interface program uses the two @samp{\032} characters as
971 a signal to display the source code for the frame.
972 @end ifclear
973
974 @ifset SERIAL
975 @item -b @var{bps}
976 Set the line speed (baud rate or bits per second) of any serial
977 interface used by @value{GDBN} for remote debugging.
978
979 @item -tty=@var{device}
980 Run using @var{device} for your program's standard input and output.
981 @c FIXME: kingdon thinks there is more to -tty. Investigate.
982 @end ifset
983 @end table
984
985 @node Quitting GDB
986 @section Quitting @value{GDBN}
987 @cindex exiting @value{GDBN}
988 @cindex leaving @value{GDBN}
989
990 @table @code
991 @item quit
992 @kindex quit
993 @kindex q
994 To exit @value{GDBN}, use the @code{quit} command (abbreviated @code{q}), or type
995 an end-of-file character (usually @kbd{C-d}).
996 @end table
997
998 @cindex interrupt
999 An interrupt (often @kbd{C-c}) will not exit from @value{GDBN}, but rather
1000 will terminate the action of any @value{GDBN} command that is in progress and
1001 return to @value{GDBN} command level. It is safe to type the interrupt
1002 character at any time because @value{GDBN} does not allow it to take effect
1003 until a time when it is safe.
1004
1005 @ifclear BARETARGET
1006 If you have been using @value{GDBN} to control an attached process or
1007 device, you can release it with the @code{detach} command
1008 (@pxref{Attach, ,Debugging an already-running process}).
1009 @end ifclear
1010
1011 @node Shell Commands
1012 @section Shell commands
1013
1014 If you need to execute occasional shell commands during your
1015 debugging session, there is no need to leave or suspend @value{GDBN}; you can
1016 just use the @code{shell} command.
1017
1018 @table @code
1019 @item shell @var{command string}
1020 @kindex shell
1021 @cindex shell escape
1022 Invoke a the standard shell to execute @var{command string}.
1023 @ifclear DOSHOST
1024 If it exists, the environment variable @code{SHELL} determines which
1025 shell to run. Otherwise @value{GDBN} uses @code{/bin/sh}.
1026 @end ifclear
1027 @end table
1028
1029 The utility @code{make} is often needed in development environments.
1030 You do not have to use the @code{shell} command for this purpose in
1031 @value{GDBN}:
1032
1033 @table @code
1034 @item make @var{make-args}
1035 @kindex make
1036 @cindex calling make
1037 Execute the @code{make} program with the specified
1038 arguments. This is equivalent to @samp{shell make @var{make-args}}.
1039 @end table
1040
1041 @node Commands
1042 @chapter @value{GDBN} Commands
1043
1044 You can abbreviate a @value{GDBN} command to the first few letters of the command
1045 name, if that abbreviation is unambiguous; and you can repeat certain
1046 @value{GDBN} commands by typing just @key{RET}. You can also use the @key{TAB}
1047 key to get @value{GDBN} to fill out the rest of a word in a command (or to
1048 show you the alternatives available, if there is more than one possibility).
1049
1050 @menu
1051 * Command Syntax:: How to give commands to @value{GDBN}
1052 * Completion:: Command completion
1053 * Help:: How to ask @value{GDBN} for help
1054 @end menu
1055
1056 @node Command Syntax
1057 @section Command syntax
1058
1059 A @value{GDBN} command is a single line of input. There is no limit on
1060 how long it can be. It starts with a command name, which is followed by
1061 arguments whose meaning depends on the command name. For example, the
1062 command @code{step} accepts an argument which is the number of times to
1063 step, as in @samp{step 5}. You can also use the @code{step} command
1064 with no arguments. Some command names do not allow any arguments.
1065
1066 @cindex abbreviation
1067 @value{GDBN} command names may always be truncated if that abbreviation is
1068 unambiguous. Other possible command abbreviations are listed in the
1069 documentation for individual commands. In some cases, even ambiguous
1070 abbreviations are allowed; for example, @code{s} is specially defined as
1071 equivalent to @code{step} even though there are other commands whose
1072 names start with @code{s}. You can test abbreviations by using them as
1073 arguments to the @code{help} command.
1074
1075 @cindex repeating commands
1076 @kindex RET
1077 A blank line as input to @value{GDBN} (typing just @key{RET}) means to
1078 repeat the previous command. Certain commands (for example, @code{run})
1079 will not repeat this way; these are commands for which unintentional
1080 repetition might cause trouble and which you are unlikely to want to
1081 repeat.
1082
1083 The @code{list} and @code{x} commands, when you repeat them with
1084 @key{RET}, construct new arguments rather than repeating
1085 exactly as typed. This permits easy scanning of source or memory.
1086
1087 @value{GDBN} can also use @key{RET} in another way: to partition lengthy
1088 output, in a way similar to the common utility @code{more}
1089 (@pxref{Screen Size,,Screen size}). Since it is easy to press one
1090 @key{RET} too many in this situation, @value{GDBN} disables command
1091 repetition after any command that generates this sort of display.
1092
1093 @kindex #
1094 @cindex comment
1095 Any text from a @kbd{#} to the end of the line is a comment; it does
1096 nothing. This is useful mainly in command files (@pxref{Command
1097 Files,,Command files}).
1098
1099 @node Completion
1100 @section Command completion
1101
1102 @cindex completion
1103 @cindex word completion
1104 @value{GDBN} can fill in the rest of a word in a command for you, if there is
1105 only one possibility; it can also show you what the valid possibilities
1106 are for the next word in a command, at any time. This works for @value{GDBN}
1107 commands, @value{GDBN} subcommands, and the names of symbols in your program.
1108
1109 Press the @key{TAB} key whenever you want @value{GDBN} to fill out the rest
1110 of a word. If there is only one possibility, @value{GDBN} will fill in the
1111 word, and wait for you to finish the command (or press @key{RET} to
1112 enter it). For example, if you type
1113
1114 @c FIXME "@key" does not distinguish its argument sufficiently to permit
1115 @c complete accuracy in these examples; space introduced for clarity.
1116 @c If texinfo enhancements make it unnecessary, it would be nice to
1117 @c replace " @key" by "@key" in the following...
1118 @example
1119 (@value{GDBP}) info bre @key{TAB}
1120 @end example
1121
1122 @noindent
1123 @value{GDBN} fills in the rest of the word @samp{breakpoints}, since that is
1124 the only @code{info} subcommand beginning with @samp{bre}:
1125
1126 @example
1127 (@value{GDBP}) info breakpoints
1128 @end example
1129
1130 @noindent
1131 You can either press @key{RET} at this point, to run the @code{info
1132 breakpoints} command, or backspace and enter something else, if
1133 @samp{breakpoints} does not look like the command you expected. (If you
1134 were sure you wanted @code{info breakpoints} in the first place, you
1135 might as well just type @key{RET} immediately after @samp{info bre},
1136 to exploit command abbreviations rather than command completion).
1137
1138 If there is more than one possibility for the next word when you press
1139 @key{TAB}, @value{GDBN} will sound a bell. You can either supply more
1140 characters and try again, or just press @key{TAB} a second time, and
1141 @value{GDBN} will display all the possible completions for that word. For
1142 example, you might want to set a breakpoint on a subroutine whose name
1143 begins with @samp{make_}, but when you type @kbd{b make_@key{TAB}} @value{GDBN}
1144 just sounds the bell. Typing @key{TAB} again will display all the
1145 function names in your program that begin with those characters, for
1146 example:
1147
1148 @example
1149 (@value{GDBP}) b make_ @key{TAB}
1150 @exdent @value{GDBN} sounds bell; press @key{TAB} again, to see:
1151 make_a_section_from_file make_environ
1152 make_abs_section make_function_type
1153 make_blockvector make_pointer_type
1154 make_cleanup make_reference_type
1155 make_command make_symbol_completion_list
1156 (@value{GDBP}) b make_
1157 @end example
1158
1159 @noindent
1160 After displaying the available possibilities, @value{GDBN} copies your
1161 partial input (@samp{b make_} in the example) so you can finish the
1162 command.
1163
1164 If you just want to see the list of alternatives in the first place, you
1165 can press @kbd{M-?} rather than pressing @key{TAB} twice. @kbd{M-?}
1166 means @kbd{@key{META} ?}. You can type this
1167 @ifclear DOSHOST
1168 either by holding down a
1169 key designated as the @key{META} shift on your keyboard (if there is
1170 one) while typing @kbd{?}, or
1171 @end ifclear
1172 as @key{ESC} followed by @kbd{?}.
1173
1174 @cindex quotes in commands
1175 @cindex completion of quoted strings
1176 Sometimes the string you need, while logically a ``word'', may contain
1177 parentheses or other characters that @value{GDBN} normally excludes from its
1178 notion of a word. To permit word completion to work in this situation,
1179 you may enclose words in @code{'} (single quote marks) in @value{GDBN} commands.
1180
1181 @ifclear CONLY
1182 The most likely situation where you might need this is in typing the
1183 name of a C++ function. This is because C++ allows function overloading
1184 (multiple definitions of the same function, distinguished by argument
1185 type). For example, when you want to set a breakpoint you may need to
1186 distinguish whether you mean the version of @code{name} that takes an
1187 @code{int} parameter, @code{name(int)}, or the version that takes a
1188 @code{float} parameter, @code{name(float)}. To use the word-completion
1189 facilities in this situation, type a single quote @code{'} at the
1190 beginning of the function name. This alerts @value{GDBN} that it may need to
1191 consider more information than usual when you press @key{TAB} or
1192 @kbd{M-?} to request word completion:
1193
1194 @example
1195 (@value{GDBP}) b 'bubble( @key{M-?}
1196 bubble(double,double) bubble(int,int)
1197 (@value{GDBP}) b 'bubble(
1198 @end example
1199
1200 In some cases, @value{GDBN} can tell that completing a name will require
1201 quotes. When this happens, @value{GDBN} will insert the quote for you (while
1202 completing as much as it can) if you do not type the quote in the first
1203 place:
1204
1205 @example
1206 (@value{GDBP}) b bub @key{TAB}
1207 @exdent @value{GDBN} alters your input line to the following, and rings a bell:
1208 (@value{GDBP}) b 'bubble(
1209 @end example
1210
1211 @noindent
1212 In general, @value{GDBN} can tell that a quote is needed (and inserts it) if
1213 you have not yet started typing the argument list when you ask for
1214 completion on an overloaded symbol.
1215 @end ifclear
1216
1217
1218 @node Help
1219 @section Getting help
1220 @cindex online documentation
1221 @kindex help
1222
1223 You can always ask @value{GDBN} itself for information on its commands, using the
1224 command @code{help}.
1225
1226 @table @code
1227 @item help
1228 @itemx h
1229 @kindex h
1230 You can use @code{help} (abbreviated @code{h}) with no arguments to
1231 display a short list of named classes of commands:
1232
1233 @smallexample
1234 (@value{GDBP}) help
1235 List of classes of commands:
1236
1237 running -- Running the program
1238 stack -- Examining the stack
1239 data -- Examining data
1240 breakpoints -- Making program stop at certain points
1241 files -- Specifying and examining files
1242 status -- Status inquiries
1243 support -- Support facilities
1244 user-defined -- User-defined commands
1245 aliases -- Aliases of other commands
1246 obscure -- Obscure features
1247
1248 Type "help" followed by a class name for a list of
1249 commands in that class.
1250 Type "help" followed by command name for full
1251 documentation.
1252 Command name abbreviations are allowed if unambiguous.
1253 (@value{GDBP})
1254 @end smallexample
1255
1256 @item help @var{class}
1257 Using one of the general help classes as an argument, you can get a
1258 list of the individual commands in that class. For example, here is the
1259 help display for the class @code{status}:
1260
1261 @smallexample
1262 (@value{GDBP}) help status
1263 Status inquiries.
1264
1265 List of commands:
1266
1267 @c Line break in "show" line falsifies real output, but needed
1268 @c to fit in smallbook page size.
1269 show -- Generic command for showing things set
1270 with "set"
1271 info -- Generic command for printing status
1272
1273 Type "help" followed by command name for full
1274 documentation.
1275 Command name abbreviations are allowed if unambiguous.
1276 (@value{GDBP})
1277 @end smallexample
1278
1279 @item help @var{command}
1280 With a command name as @code{help} argument, @value{GDBN} will display a
1281 short paragraph on how to use that command.
1282 @end table
1283
1284 In addition to @code{help}, you can use the @value{GDBN} commands @code{info}
1285 and @code{show} to inquire about the state of your program, or the state
1286 of @value{GDBN} itself. Each command supports many topics of inquiry; this
1287 manual introduces each of them in the appropriate context. The listings
1288 under @code{info} and under @code{show} in the Index point to
1289 all the sub-commands. @xref{Index}.
1290
1291 @c @group
1292 @table @code
1293 @item info
1294 @kindex info
1295 @kindex i
1296 This command (abbreviated @code{i}) is for describing the state of your
1297 program. For example, you can list the arguments given to your program
1298 with @code{info args}, list the registers currently in use with @code{info
1299 registers}, or list the breakpoints you have set with @code{info breakpoints}.
1300 You can get a complete list of the @code{info} sub-commands with
1301 @w{@code{help info}}.
1302
1303 @kindex show
1304 @item show
1305 In contrast, @code{show} is for describing the state of @value{GDBN} itself.
1306 You can change most of the things you can @code{show}, by using the
1307 related command @code{set}; for example, you can control what number
1308 system is used for displays with @code{set radix}, or simply inquire
1309 which is currently in use with @code{show radix}.
1310
1311 @kindex info set
1312 To display all the settable parameters and their current
1313 values, you can use @code{show} with no arguments; you may also use
1314 @code{info set}. Both commands produce the same display.
1315 @c FIXME: "info set" violates the rule that "info" is for state of
1316 @c FIXME...program. Ck w/ GNU: "info set" to be called something else,
1317 @c FIXME...or change desc of rule---eg "state of prog and debugging session"?
1318 @end table
1319 @c @end group
1320
1321 Here are three miscellaneous @code{show} subcommands, all of which are
1322 exceptional in lacking corresponding @code{set} commands:
1323
1324 @table @code
1325 @kindex show version
1326 @cindex version number
1327 @item show version
1328 Show what version of @value{GDBN} is running. You should include this
1329 information in @value{GDBN} bug-reports. If multiple versions of @value{GDBN} are in
1330 use at your site, you may occasionally want to determine which version
1331 of @value{GDBN} you are running; as @value{GDBN} evolves, new commands are introduced,
1332 and old ones may wither away. The version number is also announced
1333 when you start @value{GDBN} with no arguments.
1334
1335 @kindex show copying
1336 @item show copying
1337 Display information about permission for copying @value{GDBN}.
1338
1339 @kindex show warranty
1340 @item show warranty
1341 Display the GNU ``NO WARRANTY'' statement.
1342 @end table
1343
1344 @node Running
1345 @chapter Running Programs Under @value{GDBN}
1346
1347 When you run a program under @value{GDBN}, you must first generate
1348 debugging information when you compile it.
1349 @ifclear BARETARGET
1350 You may start it with its arguments, if any, in an environment of your
1351 choice. You may redirect your program's input and output, debug an
1352 already running process, or kill a child process.
1353 @end ifclear
1354
1355 @menu
1356 * Compilation:: Compiling for debugging
1357 * Starting:: Starting your program
1358 @ifclear BARETARGET
1359 * Arguments:: Your program's arguments
1360 * Environment:: Your program's environment
1361 * Working Directory:: Your program's working directory
1362 * Input/Output:: Your program's input and output
1363 * Attach:: Debugging an already-running process
1364 * Kill Process:: Killing the child process
1365 * Process Information:: Additional process information
1366 @end ifclear
1367 @end menu
1368
1369 @node Compilation
1370 @section Compiling for debugging
1371
1372 In order to debug a program effectively, you need to generate
1373 debugging information when you compile it. This debugging information
1374 is stored in the object file; it describes the data type of each
1375 variable or function and the correspondence between source line numbers
1376 and addresses in the executable code.
1377
1378 To request debugging information, specify the @samp{-g} option when you run
1379 the compiler.
1380
1381 Many C compilers are unable to handle the @samp{-g} and @samp{-O}
1382 options together. Using those compilers, you cannot generate optimized
1383 executables containing debugging information.
1384
1385 @value{NGCC}, the GNU C compiler, supports @samp{-g} with or without
1386 @samp{-O}, making it possible to debug optimized code. We recommend
1387 that you @emph{always} use @samp{-g} whenever you compile a program.
1388 You may think your program is correct, but there is no sense in pushing
1389 your luck.
1390
1391 @cindex optimized code, debugging
1392 @cindex debugging optimized code
1393 When you debug a program compiled with @samp{-g -O}, remember that the
1394 optimizer is rearranging your code; the debugger will show you what is
1395 really there. Do not be too surprised when the execution path does not
1396 exactly match your source file! An extreme example: if you define a
1397 variable, but never use it, @value{GDBN} will never see that
1398 variable---because the compiler optimizes it out of existence.
1399
1400 Some things do not work as well with @samp{-g -O} as with just
1401 @samp{-g}, particularly on machines with instruction scheduling. If in
1402 doubt, recompile with @samp{-g} alone, and if this fixes the problem,
1403 please report it as a bug (including a test case!).
1404
1405 Older versions of the GNU C compiler permitted a variant option
1406 @w{@samp{-gg}} for debugging information. @value{GDBN} no longer supports this
1407 format; if your GNU C compiler has this option, do not use it.
1408
1409 @ignore
1410 @comment As far as I know, there are no cases in which @value{GDBN} will
1411 @comment produce strange output in this case. (but no promises).
1412 If your program includes archives made with the @code{ar} program, and
1413 if the object files used as input to @code{ar} were compiled without the
1414 @samp{-g} option and have names longer than 15 characters, @value{GDBN} will get
1415 confused reading your program's symbol table. No error message will be
1416 given, but @value{GDBN} may behave strangely. The reason for this problem is a
1417 deficiency in the Unix archive file format, which cannot represent file
1418 names longer than 15 characters.
1419
1420 To avoid this problem, compile the archive members with the @samp{-g}
1421 option or use shorter file names. Alternatively, use a version of GNU
1422 @code{ar} dated more recently than August 1989.
1423 @end ignore
1424
1425 @node Starting
1426 @section Starting your program
1427 @cindex starting
1428 @cindex running
1429
1430 @table @code
1431 @item run
1432 @itemx r
1433 @kindex run
1434 Use the @code{run} command to start your program under @value{GDBN}. You must
1435 first specify the program name
1436 @ifset VXWORKS
1437 (except on VxWorks)
1438 @end ifset
1439 with an argument to @value{GDBN} (@pxref{Invocation, ,Getting In and
1440 Out of @value{GDBN}}), or by using the @code{file} or @code{exec-file}
1441 command (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}).
1442
1443 @end table
1444
1445 @ifclear BARETARGET
1446 If you are running your program in an execution environment that
1447 supports processes, @code{run} creates an inferior process and makes
1448 that process run your program. (In environments without processes,
1449 @code{run} jumps to the start of your program.)
1450
1451 The execution of a program is affected by certain information it
1452 receives from its superior. @value{GDBN} provides ways to specify this
1453 information, which you must do @emph{before} starting your program. (You
1454 can change it after starting your program, but such changes will only affect
1455 your program the next time you start it.) This information may be
1456 divided into four categories:
1457
1458 @table @asis
1459 @item The @emph{arguments.}
1460 Specify the arguments to give your program as the arguments of the
1461 @code{run} command. If a shell is available on your target, the shell
1462 is used to pass the arguments, so that you may use normal conventions
1463 (such as wildcard expansion or variable substitution) in describing
1464 the arguments. In Unix systems, you can control which shell is used
1465 with the @code{SHELL} environment variable. @xref{Arguments, ,Your
1466 program's arguments}.
1467
1468 @item The @emph{environment.}
1469 Your program normally inherits its environment from @value{GDBN}, but you can
1470 use the @value{GDBN} commands @code{set environment} and @code{unset
1471 environment} to change parts of the environment that will be given to
1472 your program. @xref{Environment, ,Your program's environment}.
1473
1474 @item The @emph{working directory.}
1475 Your program inherits its working directory from @value{GDBN}. You can set
1476 the @value{GDBN} working directory with the @code{cd} command in @value{GDBN}.
1477 @xref{Working Directory, ,Your program's working directory}.
1478
1479 @item The @emph{standard input and output.}
1480 Your program normally uses the same device for standard input and
1481 standard output as @value{GDBN} is using. You can redirect input and output
1482 in the @code{run} command line, or you can use the @code{tty} command to
1483 set a different device for your program.
1484 @xref{Input/Output, ,Your program's input and output}.
1485
1486 @cindex pipes
1487 @emph{Warning:} While input and output redirection work, you cannot use
1488 pipes to pass the output of the program you are debugging to another
1489 program; if you attempt this, @value{GDBN} is likely to wind up debugging the
1490 wrong program.
1491 @end table
1492 @end ifclear
1493
1494 When you issue the @code{run} command, your program begins to execute
1495 immediately. @xref{Stopping, ,Stopping and continuing}, for discussion
1496 of how to arrange for your program to stop. Once your program has
1497 stopped, you may calls functions in your program, using the @code{print}
1498 or @code{call} commands. @xref{Data, ,Examining Data}.
1499
1500 If the modification time of your symbol file has changed since the
1501 last time @value{GDBN} read its symbols, @value{GDBN} will discard its symbol table and
1502 re-read it. When it does this, @value{GDBN} tries to retain your current
1503 breakpoints.
1504
1505 @ifclear BARETARGET
1506 @node Arguments
1507 @section Your program's arguments
1508
1509 @cindex arguments (to your program)
1510 The arguments to your program can be specified by the arguments of the
1511 @code{run} command. They are passed to a shell, which expands wildcard
1512 characters and performs redirection of I/O, and thence to your program.
1513 Your @code{SHELL} environment variable (if it exists) specifies what
1514 shell @value{GDBN} if you do not define @code{SHELL}, @value{GDBN} uses
1515 @code{/bin/sh}.
1516
1517 @code{run} with no arguments uses the same arguments used by the previous
1518 @code{run}, or those set by the @code{set args} command.
1519
1520 @kindex set args
1521 @table @code
1522 @item set args
1523 Specify the arguments to be used the next time your program is run. If
1524 @code{set args} has no arguments, @code{run} will execute your program
1525 with no arguments. Once you have run your program with arguments,
1526 using @code{set args} before the next @code{run} is the only way to run
1527 it again without arguments.
1528
1529 @item show args
1530 @kindex show args
1531 Show the arguments to give your program when it is started.
1532 @end table
1533
1534 @node Environment
1535 @section Your program's environment
1536
1537 @cindex environment (of your program)
1538 The @dfn{environment} consists of a set of environment variables and
1539 their values. Environment variables conventionally record such things as
1540 your user name, your home directory, your terminal type, and your search
1541 path for programs to run. Usually you set up environment variables with
1542 the shell and they are inherited by all the other programs you run. When
1543 debugging, it can be useful to try running your program with a modified
1544 environment without having to start @value{GDBN} over again.
1545
1546 @table @code
1547 @item path @var{directory}
1548 @kindex path
1549 Add @var{directory} to the front of the @code{PATH} environment variable
1550 (the search path for executables), for both @value{GDBN} and your program.
1551 You may specify several directory names, separated by @samp{:} or
1552 whitespace. If @var{directory} is already in the path, it is moved to
1553 the front, so it will be searched sooner.
1554
1555 You can use the string @samp{$cwd} to refer to whatever is the current
1556 working directory at the time @value{GDBN} searches the path. If you use
1557 @samp{.} instead, it refers to the directory where you executed the
1558 @code{path} command. @value{GDBN} fills in the current path where needed in
1559 the @var{directory} argument, before adding it to the search path.
1560 @c 'path' is explicitly nonrepeatable, but RMS points out it is silly to
1561 @c document that, since repeating it would be a no-op.
1562
1563 @item show paths
1564 @kindex show paths
1565 Display the list of search paths for executables (the @code{PATH}
1566 environment variable).
1567
1568 @item show environment @r{[}@var{varname}@r{]}
1569 @kindex show environment
1570 Print the value of environment variable @var{varname} to be given to
1571 your program when it starts. If you do not supply @var{varname},
1572 print the names and values of all environment variables to be given to
1573 your program. You can abbreviate @code{environment} as @code{env}.
1574
1575 @item set environment @var{varname} @r{[}=@r{]} @var{value}
1576 @kindex set environment
1577 Set environment variable @var{varname} to @var{value}. The value
1578 changes for your program only, not for @value{GDBN} itself. @var{value} may
1579 be any string; the values of environment variables are just strings, and
1580 any interpretation is supplied by your program itself. The @var{value}
1581 parameter is optional; if it is eliminated, the variable is set to a
1582 null value.
1583 @c "any string" here does not include leading, trailing
1584 @c blanks. Gnu asks: does anyone care?
1585
1586 For example, this command:
1587
1588 @example
1589 set env USER = foo
1590 @end example
1591
1592 @noindent
1593 tells a Unix program, when subsequently run, that its user is named
1594 @samp{foo}. (The spaces around @samp{=} are used for clarity here; they
1595 are not actually required.)
1596
1597 @item unset environment @var{varname}
1598 @kindex unset environment
1599 Remove variable @var{varname} from the environment to be passed to your
1600 program. This is different from @samp{set env @var{varname} =};
1601 @code{unset environment} removes the variable from the environment,
1602 rather than assigning it an empty value.
1603 @end table
1604
1605 @emph{Warning:} @value{GDBN} runs your program using the shell indicated
1606 by your @code{SHELL} environment variable if it exists (or
1607 @code{/bin/sh} if not). If your @code{SHELL} variable names a shell
1608 that runs an initialization file---such as @file{.cshrc} for C-shell, or
1609 @file{.bashrc} for BASH---any variables you set in that file will affect
1610 your program. You may wish to move setting of environment variables to
1611 files that are only run when you sign on, such as @file{.login} or
1612 @file{.profile}.
1613
1614 @node Working Directory
1615 @section Your program's working directory
1616
1617 @cindex working directory (of your program)
1618 Each time you start your program with @code{run}, it inherits its
1619 working directory from the current working directory of @value{GDBN}.
1620 The @value{GDBN} working directory is initially whatever it inherited
1621 from its parent process (typically the shell), but you can specify a new
1622 working directory in @value{GDBN} with the @code{cd} command.
1623
1624 The @value{GDBN} working directory also serves as a default for the commands
1625 that specify files for @value{GDBN} to operate on. @xref{Files, ,Commands to
1626 specify files}.
1627
1628 @table @code
1629 @item cd @var{directory}
1630 @kindex cd
1631 Set the @value{GDBN} working directory to @var{directory}.
1632
1633 @item pwd
1634 @kindex pwd
1635 Print the @value{GDBN} working directory.
1636 @end table
1637
1638 @node Input/Output
1639 @section Your program's input and output
1640
1641 @cindex redirection
1642 @cindex i/o
1643 @cindex terminal
1644 By default, the program you run under @value{GDBN} does input and output to
1645 the same terminal that @value{GDBN} uses. @value{GDBN} switches the terminal to
1646 its own terminal modes to interact with you, but it records the terminal
1647 modes your program was using and switches back to them when you continue
1648 running your program.
1649
1650 @table @code
1651 @item info terminal
1652 @kindex info terminal
1653 Displays information recorded by @value{GDBN} about the terminal modes your
1654 program is using.
1655 @end table
1656
1657 You can redirect your program's input and/or output using shell
1658 redirection with the @code{run} command. For example,
1659
1660 @example
1661 run > outfile
1662 @end example
1663
1664 @noindent
1665 starts your program, diverting its output to the file @file{outfile}.
1666
1667 @kindex tty
1668 @cindex controlling terminal
1669 Another way to specify where your program should do input and output is
1670 with the @code{tty} command. This command accepts a file name as
1671 argument, and causes this file to be the default for future @code{run}
1672 commands. It also resets the controlling terminal for the child
1673 process, for future @code{run} commands. For example,
1674
1675 @example
1676 tty /dev/ttyb
1677 @end example
1678
1679 @noindent
1680 directs that processes started with subsequent @code{run} commands
1681 default to do input and output on the terminal @file{/dev/ttyb} and have
1682 that as their controlling terminal.
1683
1684 An explicit redirection in @code{run} overrides the @code{tty} command's
1685 effect on the input/output device, but not its effect on the controlling
1686 terminal.
1687
1688 When you use the @code{tty} command or redirect input in the @code{run}
1689 command, only the input @emph{for your program} is affected. The input
1690 for @value{GDBN} still comes from your terminal.
1691
1692 @node Attach
1693 @section Debugging an already-running process
1694 @kindex attach
1695 @cindex attach
1696
1697 @table @code
1698 @item attach @var{process-id}
1699 This command attaches to a running process---one that was started
1700 outside @value{GDBN}. (@code{info files} will show your active
1701 targets.) The command takes as argument a process ID. The usual way to
1702 find out the process-id of a Unix process is with the @code{ps} utility,
1703 or with the @samp{jobs -l} shell command.
1704
1705 @code{attach} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} a second time after
1706 executing the command.
1707 @end table
1708
1709 To use @code{attach}, you must be debugging in an environment which
1710 supports processes. You must also have permission to send the process a
1711 signal, and it must have the same effective user ID as the @value{GDBN}
1712 process.
1713
1714 When using @code{attach}, you should first use the @code{file} command
1715 to specify the program running in the process and load its symbol table.
1716 @xref{Files, ,Commands to Specify Files}.
1717
1718 The first thing @value{GDBN} does after arranging to debug the specified
1719 process is to stop it. You can examine and modify an attached process
1720 with all the @value{GDBN} commands that are ordinarily available when you start
1721 processes with @code{run}. You can insert breakpoints; you can step and
1722 continue; you can modify storage. If you would rather the process
1723 continue running, you may use the @code{continue} command after
1724 attaching @value{GDBN} to the process.
1725
1726 @table @code
1727 @item detach
1728 @kindex detach
1729 When you have finished debugging the attached process, you can use the
1730 @code{detach} command to release it from @value{GDBN} control. Detaching
1731 the process continues its execution. After the @code{detach} command,
1732 that process and @value{GDBN} become completely independent once more, and you
1733 are ready to @code{attach} another process or start one with @code{run}.
1734 @code{detach} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after
1735 executing the command.
1736 @end table
1737
1738 If you exit @value{GDBN} or use the @code{run} command while you have an attached
1739 process, you kill that process. By default, you will be asked for
1740 confirmation if you try to do either of these things; you can control
1741 whether or not you need to confirm by using the @code{set confirm} command
1742 (@pxref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional warnings and messages}).
1743
1744 @node Kill Process
1745 @c @group
1746 @section Killing the child process
1747
1748 @table @code
1749 @item kill
1750 @kindex kill
1751 Kill the child process in which your program is running under @value{GDBN}.
1752 @end table
1753
1754 This command is useful if you wish to debug a core dump instead of a
1755 running process. @value{GDBN} ignores any core dump file while your program
1756 is running.
1757 @c @end group
1758
1759 On some operating systems, a program cannot be executed outside @value{GDBN}
1760 while you have breakpoints set on it inside @value{GDBN}. You can use the
1761 @code{kill} command in this situation to permit running your program
1762 outside the debugger.
1763
1764 The @code{kill} command is also useful if you wish to recompile and
1765 relink your program, since on many systems it is impossible to modify an
1766 executable file while it is running in a process. In this case, when you
1767 next type @code{run}, @value{GDBN} will notice that the file has changed, and
1768 will re-read the symbol table (while trying to preserve your current
1769 breakpoint settings).
1770
1771 @node Process Information
1772 @section Additional process information
1773
1774 @kindex /proc
1775 @cindex process image
1776 Some operating systems provide a facility called @samp{/proc} that can
1777 be used to examine the image of a running process using file-system
1778 subroutines. If @value{GDBN} is configured for an operating system with this
1779 facility, the command @code{info proc} is available to report on several
1780 kinds of information about the process running your program.
1781
1782 @table @code
1783 @item info proc
1784 @kindex info proc
1785 Summarize available information about the process.
1786
1787 @item info proc mappings
1788 @kindex info proc mappings
1789 Report on the address ranges accessible in the program, with information
1790 on whether your program may read, write, or execute each range.
1791
1792 @item info proc times
1793 @kindex info proc times
1794 Starting time, user CPU time, and system CPU time for your program and
1795 its children.
1796
1797 @item info proc id
1798 @kindex info proc id
1799 Report on the process IDs related to your program: its own process ID,
1800 the ID of its parent, the process group ID, and the session ID.
1801
1802 @item info proc status
1803 @kindex info proc status
1804 General information on the state of the process. If the process is
1805 stopped, this report includes the reason for stopping, and any signal
1806 received.
1807
1808 @item info proc all
1809 Show all the above information about the process.
1810 @end table
1811 @end ifclear
1812
1813 @node Stopping
1814 @chapter Stopping and Continuing
1815
1816 The principal purposes of using a debugger are so that you can stop your
1817 program before it terminates; or so that, if your program runs into
1818 trouble, you can investigate and find out why.
1819
1820 Inside @value{GDBN}, your program may stop for any of several reasons, such
1821 as
1822 @ifclear BARETARGET
1823 a signal,
1824 @end ifclear
1825 a breakpoint, or reaching a new line after a @value{GDBN}
1826 command such as @code{step}. You may then examine and change
1827 variables, set new breakpoints or remove old ones, and then continue
1828 execution. Usually, the messages shown by @value{GDBN} provide ample
1829 explanation of the status of your program---but you can also explicitly
1830 request this information at any time.
1831
1832 @table @code
1833 @item info program
1834 @kindex info program
1835 Display information about the status of your program: whether it is
1836 running or not,
1837 @ifclear BARETARGET
1838 what process it is,
1839 @end ifclear
1840 and why it stopped.
1841 @end table
1842
1843 @menu
1844 @ifclear CONLY
1845 * Breakpoints:: Breakpoints, watchpoints, and exceptions
1846 @end ifclear
1847 @ifset CONLY
1848 * Breakpoints:: Breakpoints and watchpoints
1849 @end ifset
1850 @c Remnant makeinfo bug requires blank line after *successful* end-if in menu:
1851
1852 * Continuing and Stepping:: Resuming execution
1853 @ifset POSIX
1854 * Signals:: Signals
1855 @end ifset
1856 @end menu
1857
1858 @c makeinfo node-defaulting requires adjacency of @node and sectioning cmds
1859 @c ...hence distribute @node Breakpoints over two possible @if expansions.
1860 @c
1861 @ifclear CONLY
1862 @node Breakpoints
1863 @section Breakpoints, watchpoints, and exceptions
1864 @end ifclear
1865 @ifset CONLY
1866 @node Breakpoints
1867 @section Breakpoints and watchpoints
1868 @end ifset
1869
1870 @cindex breakpoints
1871 A @dfn{breakpoint} makes your program stop whenever a certain point in
1872 the program is reached. For each breakpoint, you can add various
1873 conditions to control in finer detail whether your program will stop.
1874 You can set breakpoints with the @code{break} command and its variants
1875 (@pxref{Set Breaks, ,Setting breakpoints}), to specify the place where
1876 your program should stop by line number, function name or exact address
1877 in the program.
1878 @ifclear CONLY
1879 In languages with exception handling (such as GNU C++), you can also set
1880 breakpoints where an exception is raised (@pxref{Exception Handling,
1881 ,Breakpoints and exceptions}).
1882 @end ifclear
1883
1884 @cindex watchpoints
1885 @cindex memory tracing
1886 @cindex breakpoint on memory address
1887 @cindex breakpoint on variable modification
1888 A @dfn{watchpoint} is a special breakpoint that stops your program
1889 when the value of an expression changes. You must use a different
1890 command to set watchpoints (@pxref{Set Watchpoints, ,Setting
1891 watchpoints}), but aside from that, you can manage a watchpoint like
1892 any other breakpoint: you enable, disable, and delete both breakpoints
1893 and watchpoints using the same commands.
1894
1895 You can arrange to have values from your program displayed automatically
1896 whenever @value{GDBN} stops at a breakpoint. @xref{Auto Display,
1897 ,Automatic display}.
1898
1899 @cindex breakpoint numbers
1900 @cindex numbers for breakpoints
1901 @value{GDBN} assigns a number to each breakpoint or watchpoint when you
1902 create it; these numbers are successive integers starting with one. In
1903 many of the commands for controlling various features of breakpoints you
1904 use the breakpoint number to say which breakpoint you want to change.
1905 Each breakpoint may be @dfn{enabled} or @dfn{disabled}; if disabled, it has
1906 no effect on your program until you enable it again.
1907
1908 @menu
1909 * Set Breaks:: Setting breakpoints
1910 * Set Watchpoints:: Setting watchpoints
1911 @ifclear CONLY
1912 * Exception Handling:: Breakpoints and exceptions
1913 @end ifclear
1914
1915 * Delete Breaks:: Deleting breakpoints
1916 * Disabling:: Disabling breakpoints
1917 * Conditions:: Break conditions
1918 * Break Commands:: Breakpoint command lists
1919 @ifclear CONLY
1920 * Breakpoint Menus:: Breakpoint menus
1921 @end ifclear
1922 @ifclear BARETARGET
1923 * Error in Breakpoints:: ``Cannot insert breakpoints''
1924 @end ifclear
1925 @end menu
1926
1927 @node Set Breaks
1928 @subsection Setting breakpoints
1929
1930 @c FIXME LMB what does GDB do if no code on line of breakpt?
1931 @c consider in particular declaration with/without initialization.
1932 @c
1933 @c FIXME 2 is there stuff on this already? break at fun start, already init?
1934
1935 @kindex break
1936 @kindex b
1937 @kindex $bpnum
1938 @cindex latest breakpoint
1939 Breakpoints are set with the @code{break} command (abbreviated
1940 @code{b}). The debugger convenience variable @samp{$bpnum} records the
1941 number of the beakpoint you've set most recently; see @ref{Convenience
1942 Vars,, Convenience variables}, for a discussion of what you can do with
1943 convenience variables.
1944
1945 You have several ways to say where the breakpoint should go.
1946
1947 @table @code
1948 @item break @var{function}
1949 Set a breakpoint at entry to function @var{function}.
1950 @ifclear CONLY
1951 When using source languages that permit overloading of symbols, such as
1952 C++, @var{function} may refer to more than one possible place to break.
1953 @xref{Breakpoint Menus,,Breakpoint menus}, for a discussion of that situation.
1954 @end ifclear
1955
1956 @item break +@var{offset}
1957 @itemx break -@var{offset}
1958 Set a breakpoint some number of lines forward or back from the position
1959 at which execution stopped in the currently selected frame.
1960
1961 @item break @var{linenum}
1962 Set a breakpoint at line @var{linenum} in the current source file.
1963 That file is the last file whose source text was printed. This
1964 breakpoint will stop your program just before it executes any of the
1965 code on that line.
1966
1967 @item break @var{filename}:@var{linenum}
1968 Set a breakpoint at line @var{linenum} in source file @var{filename}.
1969
1970 @item break @var{filename}:@var{function}
1971 Set a breakpoint at entry to function @var{function} found in file
1972 @var{filename}. Specifying a file name as well as a function name is
1973 superfluous except when multiple files contain similarly named
1974 functions.
1975
1976 @item break *@var{address}
1977 Set a breakpoint at address @var{address}. You can use this to set
1978 breakpoints in parts of your program which do not have debugging
1979 information or source files.
1980
1981 @item break
1982 When called without any arguments, @code{break} sets a breakpoint at
1983 the next instruction to be executed in the selected stack frame
1984 (@pxref{Stack, ,Examining the Stack}). In any selected frame but the
1985 innermost, this will cause your program to stop as soon as control
1986 returns to that frame. This is similar to the effect of a
1987 @code{finish} command in the frame inside the selected frame---except
1988 that @code{finish} does not leave an active breakpoint. If you use
1989 @code{break} without an argument in the innermost frame, @value{GDBN} will stop
1990 the next time it reaches the current location; this may be useful
1991 inside loops.
1992
1993 @value{GDBN} normally ignores breakpoints when it resumes execution, until at
1994 least one instruction has been executed. If it did not do this, you
1995 would be unable to proceed past a breakpoint without first disabling the
1996 breakpoint. This rule applies whether or not the breakpoint already
1997 existed when your program stopped.
1998
1999 @item break @dots{} if @var{cond}
2000 Set a breakpoint with condition @var{cond}; evaluate the expression
2001 @var{cond} each time the breakpoint is reached, and stop only if the
2002 value is nonzero---that is, if @var{cond} evaluates as true.
2003 @samp{@dots{}} stands for one of the possible arguments described
2004 above (or no argument) specifying where to break. @xref{Conditions,
2005 ,Break conditions}, for more information on breakpoint conditions.
2006
2007 @item tbreak @var{args}
2008 @kindex tbreak
2009 Set a breakpoint enabled only for one stop. @var{args} are the
2010 same as for the @code{break} command, and the breakpoint is set in the same
2011 way, but the breakpoint is automatically disabled after the first time your
2012 program stops there. @xref{Disabling, ,Disabling breakpoints}.
2013
2014 @item rbreak @var{regex}
2015 @kindex rbreak
2016 @cindex regular expression
2017 @c FIXME what kind of regexp?
2018 Set breakpoints on all functions matching the regular expression
2019 @var{regex}. This command
2020 sets an unconditional breakpoint on all matches, printing a list of all
2021 breakpoints it set. Once these breakpoints are set, they are treated
2022 just like the breakpoints set with the @code{break} command. They can
2023 be deleted, disabled, made conditional, etc., in the standard ways.
2024
2025 @ifclear CONLY
2026 When debugging C++ programs, @code{rbreak} is useful for setting
2027 breakpoints on overloaded functions that are not members of any special
2028 classes.
2029 @end ifclear
2030
2031 @kindex info breakpoints
2032 @cindex @code{$_} and @code{info breakpoints}
2033 @item info breakpoints @r{[}@var{n}@r{]}
2034 @itemx info break @r{[}@var{n}@r{]}
2035 @itemx info watchpoints @r{[}@var{n}@r{]}
2036 Print a table of all breakpoints and watchpoints set and not
2037 deleted, with the following columns for each breakpoint:
2038
2039 @table @emph
2040 @item Breakpoint Numbers
2041 @item Type
2042 Breakpoint or watchpoint.
2043 @item Disposition
2044 Whether the breakpoint is marked to be disabled or deleted when hit.
2045 @item Enabled or Disabled
2046 Enabled breakpoints are marked with @samp{y}. @samp{n} marks breakpoints
2047 that are not enabled.
2048 @item Address
2049 Where the breakpoint is in your program, as a memory address
2050 @item What
2051 Where the breakpoint is in the source for your program, as a file and
2052 line number.
2053 @end table
2054
2055 @noindent
2056 Breakpoint commands, if any, are listed after the line for the
2057 corresponding breakpoint.
2058
2059 @noindent
2060 @code{info break} with a breakpoint
2061 number @var{n} as argument lists only that breakpoint. The
2062 convenience variable @code{$_} and the default examining-address for
2063 the @code{x} command are set to the address of the last breakpoint
2064 listed (@pxref{Memory, ,Examining memory}).
2065 @end table
2066
2067 @value{GDBN} allows you to set any number of breakpoints at the same place in
2068 your program. There is nothing silly or meaningless about this. When
2069 the breakpoints are conditional, this is even useful
2070 (@pxref{Conditions, ,Break conditions}).
2071
2072 @cindex negative breakpoint numbers
2073 @cindex internal @value{GDBN} breakpoints
2074 @value{GDBN} itself sometimes sets breakpoints in your program for special
2075 purposes, such as proper handling of @code{longjmp} (in C programs).
2076 These internal breakpoints are assigned negative numbers, starting with
2077 @code{-1}; @samp{info breakpoints} does not display them.
2078
2079 You can see these breakpoints with the @value{GDBN} maintenance command
2080 @samp{maint info breakpoints}.
2081
2082 @table @code
2083 @kindex maint info breakpoints
2084 @item maint info breakpoints
2085 Using the same format as @samp{info breakpoints}, display both the
2086 breakpoints you've set explicitly, and those @value{GDBN} is using for
2087 internal purposes. Internal breakpoints are shown with negative
2088 breakpoint numbers. The type column identifies what kind of breakpoint
2089 is shown:
2090
2091 @table @code
2092 @item breakpoint
2093 Normal, explicitly set breakpoint.
2094
2095 @item watchpoint
2096 Normal, explicitly set watchpoint.
2097
2098 @item longjmp
2099 Internal breakpoint, used to handle correctly stepping through
2100 @code{longjmp} calls.
2101
2102 @item longjmp resume
2103 Internal breakpoint at the target of a @code{longjmp}.
2104
2105 @item until
2106 Temporary internal breakpoint used by the @value{GDBN} @code{until} command.
2107
2108 @item finish
2109 Temporary internal breakpoint used by the @value{GDBN} @code{finish} command.
2110 @end table
2111
2112 @end table
2113
2114
2115 @node Set Watchpoints
2116 @subsection Setting watchpoints
2117 @cindex setting watchpoints
2118
2119 You can use a watchpoint to stop execution whenever the value of an
2120 expression changes, without having to predict a particular place
2121 where this may happen.
2122
2123 Watchpoints currently execute two orders of magnitude more slowly than
2124 other breakpoints, but this can well be worth it to catch errors where
2125 you have no clue what part of your program is the culprit. Some
2126 processors provide special hardware to support watchpoint evaluation; future
2127 releases of @value{GDBN} will use such hardware if it is available.
2128
2129 @table @code
2130 @kindex watch
2131 @item watch @var{expr}
2132 Set a watchpoint for an expression.
2133
2134 @kindex info watchpoints
2135 @item info watchpoints
2136 This command prints a list of watchpoints and breakpoints; it is the
2137 same as @code{info break}.
2138 @end table
2139
2140 @ifclear CONLY
2141 @node Exception Handling
2142 @subsection Breakpoints and exceptions
2143 @cindex exception handlers
2144
2145 Some languages, such as GNU C++, implement exception handling. You can
2146 use @value{GDBN} to examine what caused your program to raise an exception,
2147 and to list the exceptions your program is prepared to handle at a
2148 given point in time.
2149
2150 @table @code
2151 @item catch @var{exceptions}
2152 @kindex catch
2153 You can set breakpoints at active exception handlers by using the
2154 @code{catch} command. @var{exceptions} is a list of names of exceptions
2155 to catch.
2156 @end table
2157
2158 You can use @code{info catch} to list active exception handlers.
2159 @xref{Frame Info, ,Information about a frame}.
2160
2161 There are currently some limitations to exception handling in @value{GDBN}.
2162 These will be corrected in a future release.
2163
2164 @itemize @bullet
2165 @item
2166 If you call a function interactively, @value{GDBN} normally returns
2167 control to you when the function has finished executing. If the call
2168 raises an exception, however, the call may bypass the mechanism that
2169 returns control to you and cause your program to simply continue
2170 running until it hits a breakpoint, catches a signal that @value{GDBN} is
2171 listening for, or exits.
2172 @item
2173 You cannot raise an exception interactively.
2174 @item
2175 You cannot interactively install an exception handler.
2176 @end itemize
2177
2178 @cindex raise exceptions
2179 Sometimes @code{catch} is not the best way to debug exception handling:
2180 if you need to know exactly where an exception is raised, it is better to
2181 stop @emph{before} the exception handler is called, since that way you
2182 can see the stack before any unwinding takes place. If you set a
2183 breakpoint in an exception handler instead, it may not be easy to find
2184 out where the exception was raised.
2185
2186 To stop just before an exception handler is called, you need some
2187 knowledge of the implementation. In the case of GNU C++, exceptions are
2188 raised by calling a library function named @code{__raise_exception}
2189 which has the following ANSI C interface:
2190
2191 @example
2192 /* @var{addr} is where the exception identifier is stored.
2193 ID is the exception identifier. */
2194 void __raise_exception (void **@var{addr}, void *@var{id});
2195 @end example
2196
2197 @noindent
2198 To make the debugger catch all exceptions before any stack
2199 unwinding takes place, set a breakpoint on @code{__raise_exception}
2200 (@pxref{Breakpoints, ,Breakpoints; watchpoints; and exceptions}).
2201
2202 With a conditional breakpoint (@pxref{Conditions, ,Break conditions})
2203 that depends on the value of @var{id}, you can stop your program when
2204 a specific exception is raised. You can use multiple conditional
2205 breakpoints to stop your program when any of a number of exceptions are
2206 raised.
2207 @end ifclear
2208
2209 @node Delete Breaks
2210 @subsection Deleting breakpoints
2211
2212 @cindex clearing breakpoints, watchpoints
2213 @cindex deleting breakpoints, watchpoints
2214 It is often necessary to eliminate a breakpoint or watchpoint once it
2215 has done its job and you no longer want your program to stop there. This
2216 is called @dfn{deleting} the breakpoint. A breakpoint that has been
2217 deleted no longer exists; it is forgotten.
2218
2219 With the @code{clear} command you can delete breakpoints according to
2220 where they are in your program. With the @code{delete} command you can
2221 delete individual breakpoints or watchpoints by specifying their
2222 breakpoint numbers.
2223
2224 It is not necessary to delete a breakpoint to proceed past it. @value{GDBN}
2225 automatically ignores breakpoints on the first instruction to be executed
2226 when you continue execution without changing the execution address.
2227
2228 @table @code
2229 @item clear
2230 @kindex clear
2231 Delete any breakpoints at the next instruction to be executed in the
2232 selected stack frame (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}). When
2233 the innermost frame is selected, this is a good way to delete a
2234 breakpoint where your program just stopped.
2235
2236 @item clear @var{function}
2237 @itemx clear @var{filename}:@var{function}
2238 Delete any breakpoints set at entry to the function @var{function}.
2239
2240 @item clear @var{linenum}
2241 @itemx clear @var{filename}:@var{linenum}
2242 Delete any breakpoints set at or within the code of the specified line.
2243
2244 @item delete @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{bnums}@dots{}@r{]}
2245 @cindex delete breakpoints
2246 @kindex delete
2247 @kindex d
2248 Delete the breakpoints or watchpoints of the numbers specified as
2249 arguments. If no argument is specified, delete all breakpoints (@value{GDBN}
2250 asks confirmation, unless you have @code{set confirm off}). You
2251 can abbreviate this command as @code{d}.
2252 @end table
2253
2254 @node Disabling
2255 @subsection Disabling breakpoints
2256
2257 @cindex disabled breakpoints
2258 @cindex enabled breakpoints
2259 Rather than deleting a breakpoint or watchpoint, you might prefer to
2260 @dfn{disable} it. This makes the breakpoint inoperative as if it had
2261 been deleted, but remembers the information on the breakpoint so that
2262 you can @dfn{enable} it again later.
2263
2264 You disable and enable breakpoints and watchpoints with the
2265 @code{enable} and @code{disable} commands, optionally specifying one or
2266 more breakpoint numbers as arguments. Use @code{info break} or
2267 @code{info watch} to print a list of breakpoints or watchpoints if you
2268 do not know which numbers to use.
2269
2270 A breakpoint or watchpoint can have any of four different states of
2271 enablement:
2272
2273 @itemize @bullet
2274 @item
2275 Enabled. The breakpoint will stop your program. A breakpoint set
2276 with the @code{break} command starts out in this state.
2277 @item
2278 Disabled. The breakpoint has no effect on your program.
2279 @item
2280 Enabled once. The breakpoint will stop your program, but
2281 when it does so it will become disabled. A breakpoint set
2282 with the @code{tbreak} command starts out in this state.
2283 @item
2284 Enabled for deletion. The breakpoint will stop your program, but
2285 immediately after it does so it will be deleted permanently.
2286 @end itemize
2287
2288 You can use the following commands to enable or disable breakpoints and
2289 watchpoints:
2290
2291 @table @code
2292 @item disable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{bnums}@dots{}@r{]}
2293 @kindex disable breakpoints
2294 @kindex disable
2295 @kindex dis
2296 Disable the specified breakpoints---or all breakpoints, if none are
2297 listed. A disabled breakpoint has no effect but is not forgotten. All
2298 options such as ignore-counts, conditions and commands are remembered in
2299 case the breakpoint is enabled again later. You may abbreviate
2300 @code{disable} as @code{dis}.
2301
2302 @item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{bnums}@dots{}@r{]}
2303 @kindex enable breakpoints
2304 @kindex enable
2305 Enable the specified breakpoints (or all defined breakpoints). They
2306 become effective once again in stopping your program.
2307
2308 @item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} once @var{bnums}@dots{}
2309 Enable the specified breakpoints temporarily. Each will be disabled
2310 again the next time it stops your program.
2311
2312 @item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} delete @var{bnums}@dots{}
2313 Enable the specified breakpoints to work once and then die. Each of
2314 the breakpoints will be deleted the next time it stops your program.
2315 @end table
2316
2317 Save for a breakpoint set with @code{tbreak} (@pxref{Set Breaks,
2318 ,Setting breakpoints}), breakpoints that you set are initially enabled;
2319 subsequently, they become disabled or enabled only when you use one of
2320 the commands above. (The command @code{until} can set and delete a
2321 breakpoint of its own, but it will not change the state of your other
2322 breakpoints; see @ref{Continuing and Stepping, ,Continuing and
2323 stepping}.)
2324
2325 @node Conditions
2326 @subsection Break conditions
2327 @cindex conditional breakpoints
2328 @cindex breakpoint conditions
2329
2330 @c FIXME what is scope of break condition expr? Context where wanted?
2331 @c in particular for a watchpoint?
2332 The simplest sort of breakpoint breaks every time your program reaches a
2333 specified place. You can also specify a @dfn{condition} for a
2334 breakpoint. A condition is just a Boolean expression in your
2335 programming language (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}). A breakpoint with
2336 a condition evaluates the expression each time your program reaches it,
2337 and your program stops only if the condition is @emph{true}.
2338
2339 This is the converse of using assertions for program validation; in that
2340 situation, you want to stop when the assertion is violated---that is,
2341 when the condition is false. In C, if you want to test an assertion expressed
2342 by the condition @var{assert}, you should set the condition
2343 @samp{! @var{assert}} on the appropriate breakpoint.
2344
2345 Conditions are also accepted for watchpoints; you may not need them,
2346 since a watchpoint is inspecting the value of an expression anyhow---but
2347 it might be simpler, say, to just set a watchpoint on a variable name,
2348 and specify a condition that tests whether the new value is an interesting
2349 one.
2350
2351 Break conditions can have side effects, and may even call functions in
2352 your program. This can be useful, for example, to activate functions
2353 that log program progress, or to use your own print functions to
2354 format special data structures. The effects are completely predictable
2355 unless there is another enabled breakpoint at the same address. (In
2356 that case, @value{GDBN} might see the other breakpoint first and stop your
2357 program without checking the condition of this one.) Note that
2358 breakpoint commands are usually more convenient and flexible for the
2359 purpose of performing side effects when a breakpoint is reached
2360 (@pxref{Break Commands, ,Breakpoint command lists}).
2361
2362 Break conditions can be specified when a breakpoint is set, by using
2363 @samp{if} in the arguments to the @code{break} command. @xref{Set
2364 Breaks, ,Setting breakpoints}. They can also be changed at any time
2365 with the @code{condition} command. The @code{watch} command does not
2366 recognize the @code{if} keyword; @code{condition} is the only way to
2367 impose a further condition on a watchpoint.
2368
2369 @table @code
2370 @item condition @var{bnum} @var{expression}
2371 @kindex condition
2372 Specify @var{expression} as the break condition for breakpoint or
2373 watchpoint number @var{bnum}. From now on, this breakpoint will stop
2374 your program only if the value of @var{expression} is true (nonzero, in
2375 C). When you use @code{condition}, @value{GDBN} checks @var{expression}
2376 immediately for syntactic correctness, and to determine whether symbols
2377 in it have referents in the context of your breakpoint.
2378 @c FIXME so what does GDB do if there is no referent? Moreover, what
2379 @c about watchpoints?
2380 @value{GDBN} does
2381 not actually evaluate @var{expression} at the time the @code{condition}
2382 command is given, however. @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.
2383
2384 @item condition @var{bnum}
2385 Remove the condition from breakpoint number @var{bnum}. It becomes
2386 an ordinary unconditional breakpoint.
2387 @end table
2388
2389 @cindex ignore count (of breakpoint)
2390 A special case of a breakpoint condition is to stop only when the
2391 breakpoint has been reached a certain number of times. This is so
2392 useful that there is a special way to do it, using the @dfn{ignore
2393 count} of the breakpoint. Every breakpoint has an ignore count, which
2394 is an integer. Most of the time, the ignore count is zero, and
2395 therefore has no effect. But if your program reaches a breakpoint whose
2396 ignore count is positive, then instead of stopping, it just decrements
2397 the ignore count by one and continues. As a result, if the ignore count
2398 value is @var{n}, the breakpoint will not stop the next @var{n} times it
2399 is reached.
2400
2401 @table @code
2402 @item ignore @var{bnum} @var{count}
2403 @kindex ignore
2404 Set the ignore count of breakpoint number @var{bnum} to @var{count}.
2405 The next @var{count} times the breakpoint is reached, your program's
2406 execution will not stop; other than to decrement the ignore count, @value{GDBN}
2407 takes no action.
2408
2409 To make the breakpoint stop the next time it is reached, specify
2410 a count of zero.
2411
2412 @item continue @var{count}
2413 @itemx c @var{count}
2414 @itemx fg @var{count}
2415 @kindex continue @var{count}
2416 Continue execution of your program, setting the ignore count of the
2417 breakpoint where your program stopped to @var{count} minus one.
2418 Thus, your program will not stop at this breakpoint until the
2419 @var{count}'th time it is reached.
2420
2421 An argument to this command is meaningful only when your program stopped
2422 due to a breakpoint. At other times, the argument to @code{continue} is
2423 ignored.
2424
2425 The synonym @code{fg} is provided purely for convenience, and has
2426 exactly the same behavior as other forms of the command.
2427 @end table
2428
2429 If a breakpoint has a positive ignore count and a condition, the condition
2430 is not checked. Once the ignore count reaches zero, the condition will
2431 be checked.
2432
2433 You could achieve the effect of the ignore count with a condition such
2434 as @w{@samp{$foo-- <= 0}} using a debugger convenience variable that
2435 is decremented each time. @xref{Convenience Vars, ,Convenience
2436 variables}.
2437
2438 @node Break Commands
2439 @subsection Breakpoint command lists
2440
2441 @cindex breakpoint commands
2442 You can give any breakpoint (or watchpoint) a series of commands to
2443 execute when your program stops due to that breakpoint. For example, you
2444 might want to print the values of certain expressions, or enable other
2445 breakpoints.
2446
2447 @table @code
2448 @item commands @r{[}@var{bnum}@r{]}
2449 @itemx @dots{} @var{command-list} @dots{}
2450 @itemx end
2451 @kindex commands
2452 @kindex end
2453 Specify a list of commands for breakpoint number @var{bnum}. The commands
2454 themselves appear on the following lines. Type a line containing just
2455 @code{end} to terminate the commands.
2456
2457 To remove all commands from a breakpoint, type @code{commands} and
2458 follow it immediately with @code{end}; that is, give no commands.
2459
2460 With no @var{bnum} argument, @code{commands} refers to the last
2461 breakpoint or watchpoint set (not to the breakpoint most recently
2462 encountered).
2463 @end table
2464
2465 Pressing @key{RET} as a means of repeating the last @value{GDBN} command is
2466 disabled within a @var{command-list}.
2467
2468 You can use breakpoint commands to start your program up again. Simply
2469 use the @code{continue} command, or @code{step}, or any other command
2470 that resumes execution.
2471
2472 Any other commands in the command list, after a command that resumes
2473 execution, are ignored. This is because any time you resume execution
2474 (even with a simple @code{next} or @code{step}), you may encounter
2475 another breakpoint---which could have its own command list, leading to
2476 ambiguities about which list to execute.
2477
2478 @kindex silent
2479 If the first command you specify in a command list is @code{silent}, the
2480 usual message about stopping at a breakpoint is not printed. This may
2481 be desirable for breakpoints that are to print a specific message and
2482 then continue. If none of the remaining commands print anything, you
2483 will see no sign that the breakpoint was reached. @code{silent} is
2484 meaningful only at the beginning of a breakpoint command list.
2485
2486 The commands @code{echo} and @code{output} that allow you to print
2487 precisely controlled output are often useful in silent breakpoints.
2488 @xref{Output, ,Commands for controlled output}.
2489
2490 For example, here is how you could use breakpoint commands to print the
2491 value of @code{x} at entry to @code{foo} whenever @code{x} is positive.
2492
2493 @example
2494 break foo if x>0
2495 commands
2496 silent
2497 echo x is\040
2498 output x
2499 echo \n
2500 cont
2501 end
2502 @end example
2503
2504 One application for breakpoint commands is to compensate for one bug so
2505 you can test for another. Put a breakpoint just after the erroneous line
2506 of code, give it a condition to detect the case in which something
2507 erroneous has been done, and give it commands to assign correct values
2508 to any variables that need them. End with the @code{continue} command
2509 so that your program does not stop, and start with the @code{silent}
2510 command so that no output is produced. Here is an example:
2511
2512 @example
2513 break 403
2514 commands
2515 silent
2516 set x = y + 4
2517 cont
2518 end
2519 @end example
2520
2521 @cindex lost output
2522 One deficiency in the operation of automatically continuing breakpoints
2523 under Unix appears when your program uses raw mode for the terminal.
2524 @value{GDBN} switches back to its own terminal modes (not raw) before executing
2525 commands, and then must switch back to raw mode when your program is
2526 continued. This causes any pending terminal input to be lost.
2527 @c FIXME: revisit below when GNU sys avail.
2528 @c In the GNU system, this will be fixed by changing the behavior of
2529 @c terminal modes.
2530
2531 Under Unix, you can get around this problem by writing actions into
2532 the breakpoint condition rather than in commands. For example,
2533
2534 @example
2535 condition 5 (x = y + 4), 0
2536 @end example
2537
2538 @noindent
2539 specifies a condition expression (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}) that will
2540 change @code{x} as needed, then always have the value zero so your
2541 program will not stop. No input is lost here, because @value{GDBN} evaluates
2542 break conditions without changing the terminal modes. When you want
2543 to have nontrivial conditions for performing the side effects, the
2544 operators @samp{&&}, @samp{||} and @samp{?@dots{}:} may be useful.
2545
2546 @ifclear CONLY
2547 @node Breakpoint Menus
2548 @subsection Breakpoint menus
2549 @cindex overloading
2550 @cindex symbol overloading
2551
2552 Some programming languages (notably C++) permit a single function name
2553 to be defined several times, for application in different contexts.
2554 This is called @dfn{overloading}. When a function name is overloaded,
2555 @samp{break @var{function}} is not enough to tell @value{GDBN} where you want
2556 a breakpoint. If you realize this will be a problem, you can use
2557 something like @samp{break @var{function}(@var{types})} to specify which
2558 particular version of the function you want. Otherwise, @value{GDBN} offers
2559 you a menu of numbered choices for different possible breakpoints, and
2560 waits for your selection with the prompt @samp{>}. The first two
2561 options are always @samp{[0] cancel} and @samp{[1] all}. Typing @kbd{1}
2562 sets a breakpoint at each definition of @var{function}, and typing
2563 @kbd{0} aborts the @code{break} command without setting any new
2564 breakpoints.
2565
2566 For example, the following session excerpt shows an attempt to set a
2567 breakpoint at the overloaded symbol @code{String::after}.
2568 We choose three particular definitions of that function name:
2569
2570 @c FIXME! This is likely to change to show arg type lists, at least
2571 @example
2572 (@value{GDBP}) b String::after
2573 [0] cancel
2574 [1] all
2575 [2] file:String.cc; line number:867
2576 [3] file:String.cc; line number:860
2577 [4] file:String.cc; line number:875
2578 [5] file:String.cc; line number:853
2579 [6] file:String.cc; line number:846
2580 [7] file:String.cc; line number:735
2581 > 2 4 6
2582 Breakpoint 1 at 0xb26c: file String.cc, line 867.
2583 Breakpoint 2 at 0xb344: file String.cc, line 875.
2584 Breakpoint 3 at 0xafcc: file String.cc, line 846.
2585 Multiple breakpoints were set.
2586 Use the "delete" command to delete unwanted breakpoints.
2587 (@value{GDBP})
2588 @end example
2589 @end ifclear
2590
2591 @ifclear BARETARGET
2592 @node Error in Breakpoints
2593 @subsection ``Cannot insert breakpoints''
2594
2595 @c FIXME: "cannot insert breakpoints" error, v unclear.
2596 @c Q in pending mail to Gilmore. ---pesch@cygnus.com, 26mar91
2597 @c some light may be shed by looking at instances of
2598 @c ONE_PROCESS_WRITETEXT. But error message seems possible otherwise
2599 @c too. pesch, 20sep91
2600 Under some operating systems, breakpoints cannot be used in a program if
2601 any other process is running that program. In this situation,
2602 attempting to run or continue a program with a breakpoint causes @value{GDBN}
2603 to stop the other process.
2604
2605 When this happens, you have three ways to proceed:
2606
2607 @enumerate
2608 @item
2609 Remove or disable the breakpoints, then continue.
2610
2611 @item
2612 Suspend @value{GDBN}, and copy the file containing your program to a new name.
2613 Resume @value{GDBN} and use the @code{exec-file} command to specify that @value{GDBN}
2614 should run your program under that name. Then start your program again.
2615
2616 @c FIXME: RMS commented here "Show example". Maybe when someone
2617 @c explains the first FIXME: in this section...
2618
2619 @item
2620 Relink your program so that the text segment is nonsharable, using the
2621 linker option @samp{-N}. The operating system limitation may not apply
2622 to nonsharable executables.
2623 @end enumerate
2624 @end ifclear
2625
2626 @node Continuing and Stepping
2627 @section Continuing and stepping
2628
2629 @cindex stepping
2630 @cindex continuing
2631 @cindex resuming execution
2632 @dfn{Continuing} means resuming program execution until your program
2633 completes normally. In contrast, @dfn{stepping} means executing just
2634 one more ``step'' of your program, where ``step'' may mean either one
2635 line of source code, or one machine instruction (depending on what
2636 particular command you use). Either when continuing
2637 or when stepping, your program may stop even sooner, due to
2638 @ifset BARETARGET
2639 a breakpoint.
2640 @end ifset
2641 @ifclear BARETARGET
2642 a breakpoint or to a signal. (If due to a signal, you may want to use
2643 @code{handle}, or use @samp{signal 0} to resume execution.
2644 @xref{Signals, ,Signals}.)
2645 @end ifclear
2646
2647 @table @code
2648 @item continue @r{[}@var{ignore-count}@r{]}
2649 @kindex continue
2650 Resume program execution, at the address where your program last stopped;
2651 any breakpoints set at that address are bypassed. The optional argument
2652 @var{ignore-count} allows you to specify a further number of times to
2653 ignore a breakpoint at this location; its effect is like that of
2654 @code{ignore} (@pxref{Conditions, ,Break conditions}).
2655
2656 To resume execution at a different place, you can use @code{return}
2657 (@pxref{Returning, ,Returning from a function}) to go back to the
2658 calling function; or @code{jump} (@pxref{Jumping, ,Continuing at a
2659 different address}) to go to an arbitrary location in your program.
2660 @end table
2661
2662 A typical technique for using stepping is to set a breakpoint
2663 @ifclear CONLY
2664 (@pxref{Breakpoints, ,Breakpoints; watchpoints; and exceptions})
2665 @end ifclear
2666 @ifset CONLY
2667 (@pxref{Breakpoints, ,Breakpoints and watchpoints})
2668 @end ifset
2669 at the
2670 beginning of the function or the section of your program where a
2671 problem is believed to lie, run your program until it stops at that
2672 breakpoint, and then step through the suspect area, examining the
2673 variables that are interesting, until you see the problem happen.
2674
2675 @table @code
2676 @item step
2677 @kindex step
2678 @kindex s
2679 Continue running your program until control reaches a different source
2680 line, then stop it and return control to @value{GDBN}. This command is
2681 abbreviated @code{s}.
2682
2683 @quotation
2684 @emph{Warning:} If you use the @code{step} command while control is
2685 within a function that was compiled without debugging information,
2686 execution will proceed until control reaches another function.
2687 @end quotation
2688
2689 @item step @var{count}
2690 Continue running as in @code{step}, but do so @var{count} times. If a
2691 breakpoint is reached,
2692 @ifclear BARETARGET
2693 or a signal not related to stepping occurs before @var{count} steps,
2694 @end ifclear
2695 stepping stops right away.
2696
2697 @item next @r{[}@var{count}@r{]}
2698 @kindex next
2699 @kindex n
2700 Continue to the next source line in the current (innermost) stack frame.
2701 Similar to @code{step}, but any function calls appearing within the line
2702 of code are executed without stopping. Execution stops when control
2703 reaches a different line of code at the stack level which was executing
2704 when the @code{next} command was given. This command is abbreviated
2705 @code{n}.
2706
2707 An argument @var{count} is a repeat count, as for @code{step}.
2708
2709 @code{next} within a function that lacks debugging information acts like
2710 @code{step}, but any function calls appearing within the code of the
2711 function are executed without stopping.
2712
2713 @item finish
2714 @kindex finish
2715 Continue running until just after function in the selected stack frame
2716 returns. Print the returned value (if any).
2717
2718 Contrast this with the @code{return} command (@pxref{Returning,
2719 ,Returning from a function}).
2720
2721 @item until
2722 @kindex until
2723 @item u
2724 @kindex u
2725 Continue running until a source line past the current line, in the
2726 current stack frame, is reached. This command is used to avoid single
2727 stepping through a loop more than once. It is like the @code{next}
2728 command, except that when @code{until} encounters a jump, it
2729 automatically continues execution until the program counter is greater
2730 than the address of the jump.
2731
2732 This means that when you reach the end of a loop after single stepping
2733 though it, @code{until} will cause your program to continue execution
2734 until the loop is exited. In contrast, a @code{next} command at the end
2735 of a loop will simply step back to the beginning of the loop, which
2736 would force you to step through the next iteration.
2737
2738 @code{until} always stops your program if it attempts to exit the current
2739 stack frame.
2740
2741 @code{until} may produce somewhat counterintuitive results if the order
2742 of machine code does not match the order of the source lines. For
2743 example, in the following excerpt from a debugging session, the @code{f}
2744 (@code{frame}) command shows that execution is stopped at line
2745 @code{206}; yet when we use @code{until}, we get to line @code{195}:
2746
2747 @example
2748 (@value{GDBP}) f
2749 #0 main (argc=4, argv=0xf7fffae8) at m4.c:206
2750 206 expand_input();
2751 (@value{GDBP}) until
2752 195 for ( ; argc > 0; NEXTARG) @{
2753 @end example
2754
2755 This happened because, for execution efficiency, the compiler had
2756 generated code for the loop closure test at the end, rather than the
2757 start, of the loop---even though the test in a C @code{for}-loop is
2758 written before the body of the loop. The @code{until} command appeared
2759 to step back to the beginning of the loop when it advanced to this
2760 expression; however, it has not really gone to an earlier
2761 statement---not in terms of the actual machine code.
2762
2763 @code{until} with no argument works by means of single
2764 instruction stepping, and hence is slower than @code{until} with an
2765 argument.
2766
2767 @item until @var{location}
2768 @item u @var{location}
2769 Continue running your program until either the specified location is
2770 reached, or the current stack frame returns. @var{location} is any of
2771 the forms of argument acceptable to @code{break} (@pxref{Set Breaks,
2772 ,Setting breakpoints}). This form of the command uses breakpoints,
2773 and hence is quicker than @code{until} without an argument.
2774
2775 @item stepi
2776 @itemx si
2777 @kindex stepi
2778 @kindex si
2779 Execute one machine instruction, then stop and return to the debugger.
2780
2781 It is often useful to do @samp{display/i $pc} when stepping by machine
2782 instructions. This will cause the next instruction to be executed to
2783 be displayed automatically at each stop. @xref{Auto Display,
2784 ,Automatic display}.
2785
2786 An argument is a repeat count, as in @code{step}.
2787
2788 @need 750
2789 @item nexti
2790 @itemx ni
2791 @kindex nexti
2792 @kindex ni
2793 Execute one machine instruction, but if it is a function call,
2794 proceed until the function returns.
2795
2796 An argument is a repeat count, as in @code{next}.
2797 @end table
2798
2799 @ifset POSIX
2800 @node Signals
2801 @section Signals
2802 @cindex signals
2803
2804 A signal is an asynchronous event that can happen in a program. The
2805 operating system defines the possible kinds of signals, and gives each
2806 kind a name and a number. For example, in Unix @code{SIGINT} is the
2807 signal a program gets when you type an interrupt (often @kbd{C-c});
2808 @code{SIGSEGV} is the signal a program gets from referencing a place in
2809 memory far away from all the areas in use; @code{SIGALRM} occurs when
2810 the alarm clock timer goes off (which happens only if your program has
2811 requested an alarm).
2812
2813 @cindex fatal signals
2814 Some signals, including @code{SIGALRM}, are a normal part of the
2815 functioning of your program. Others, such as @code{SIGSEGV}, indicate
2816 errors; these signals are @dfn{fatal} (kill your program immediately) if the
2817 program has not specified in advance some other way to handle the signal.
2818 @code{SIGINT} does not indicate an error in your program, but it is normally
2819 fatal so it can carry out the purpose of the interrupt: to kill the program.
2820
2821 @value{GDBN} has the ability to detect any occurrence of a signal in your
2822 program. You can tell @value{GDBN} in advance what to do for each kind of
2823 signal.
2824
2825 @cindex handling signals
2826 Normally, @value{GDBN} is set up to ignore non-erroneous signals like @code{SIGALRM}
2827 (so as not to interfere with their role in the functioning of your program)
2828 but to stop your program immediately whenever an error signal happens.
2829 You can change these settings with the @code{handle} command.
2830
2831 @table @code
2832 @item info signals
2833 @kindex info signals
2834 Print a table of all the kinds of signals and how @value{GDBN} has been told to
2835 handle each one. You can use this to see the signal numbers of all
2836 the defined types of signals.
2837
2838 @item handle @var{signal} @var{keywords}@dots{}
2839 @kindex handle
2840 Change the way @value{GDBN} handles signal @var{signal}. @var{signal} can be the
2841 number of a signal or its name (with or without the @samp{SIG} at the
2842 beginning). The @var{keywords} say what change to make.
2843 @end table
2844
2845 @c @group
2846 The keywords allowed by the @code{handle} command can be abbreviated.
2847 Their full names are:
2848
2849 @table @code
2850 @item nostop
2851 @value{GDBN} should not stop your program when this signal happens. It may
2852 still print a message telling you that the signal has come in.
2853
2854 @item stop
2855 @value{GDBN} should stop your program when this signal happens. This implies
2856 the @code{print} keyword as well.
2857
2858 @item print
2859 @value{GDBN} should print a message when this signal happens.
2860
2861 @item noprint
2862 @value{GDBN} should not mention the occurrence of the signal at all. This
2863 implies the @code{nostop} keyword as well.
2864
2865 @item pass
2866 @value{GDBN} should allow your program to see this signal; your program will be
2867 able to handle the signal, or may be terminated if the signal is fatal
2868 and not handled.
2869
2870 @item nopass
2871 @value{GDBN} should not allow your program to see this signal.
2872 @end table
2873 @c @end group
2874
2875 When a signal stops your program, the signal is not visible until you
2876 continue. Your program will see the signal then, if @code{pass} is in
2877 effect for the signal in question @emph{at that time}. In other words,
2878 after @value{GDBN} reports a signal, you can use the @code{handle}
2879 command with @code{pass} or @code{nopass} to control whether that
2880 signal will be seen by your program when you later continue it.
2881
2882 You can also use the @code{signal} command to prevent your program from
2883 seeing a signal, or cause it to see a signal it normally would not see,
2884 or to give it any signal at any time. For example, if your program stopped
2885 due to some sort of memory reference error, you might store correct
2886 values into the erroneous variables and continue, hoping to see more
2887 execution; but your program would probably terminate immediately as
2888 a result of the fatal signal once it saw the signal. To prevent this,
2889 you can continue with @samp{signal 0}. @xref{Signaling, ,Giving your
2890 program a signal}.
2891 @end ifset
2892
2893 @node Stack
2894 @chapter Examining the Stack
2895
2896 When your program has stopped, the first thing you need to know is where it
2897 stopped and how it got there.
2898
2899 @cindex call stack
2900 Each time your program performs a function call, the information about
2901 where in your program the call was made from is saved in a block of data
2902 called a @dfn{stack frame}. The frame also contains the arguments of the
2903 call and the local variables of the function that was called. All the
2904 stack frames are allocated in a region of memory called the @dfn{call
2905 stack}.
2906
2907 When your program stops, the @value{GDBN} commands for examining the
2908 stack allow you to see all of this information.
2909
2910 @cindex selected frame
2911 One of the stack frames is @dfn{selected} by @value{GDBN} and many
2912 @value{GDBN} commands refer implicitly to the selected frame. In
2913 particular, whenever you ask @value{GDBN} for the value of a variable in
2914 your program, the value is found in the selected frame. There are
2915 special @value{GDBN} commands to select whichever frame you are
2916 interested in.
2917
2918 When your program stops, @value{GDBN} automatically selects the
2919 currently executing frame and describes it briefly as the @code{frame}
2920 command does (@pxref{Frame Info, ,Information about a frame}).
2921
2922 @menu
2923 * Frames:: Stack frames
2924 * Backtrace:: Backtraces
2925 * Selection:: Selecting a frame
2926 * Frame Info:: Information on a frame
2927 @ifset MIPS
2928 * MIPS Stack:: MIPS machines and the function stack
2929 @end ifset
2930 @end menu
2931
2932 @node Frames
2933 @section Stack frames
2934
2935 @cindex frame
2936 @cindex stack frame
2937 The call stack is divided up into contiguous pieces called @dfn{stack
2938 frames}, or @dfn{frames} for short; each frame is the data associated
2939 with one call to one function. The frame contains the arguments given
2940 to the function, the function's local variables, and the address at
2941 which the function is executing.
2942
2943 @cindex initial frame
2944 @cindex outermost frame
2945 @cindex innermost frame
2946 When your program is started, the stack has only one frame, that of the
2947 function @code{main}. This is called the @dfn{initial} frame or the
2948 @dfn{outermost} frame. Each time a function is called, a new frame is
2949 made. Each time a function returns, the frame for that function invocation
2950 is eliminated. If a function is recursive, there can be many frames for
2951 the same function. The frame for the function in which execution is
2952 actually occurring is called the @dfn{innermost} frame. This is the most
2953 recently created of all the stack frames that still exist.
2954
2955 @cindex frame pointer
2956 Inside your program, stack frames are identified by their addresses. A
2957 stack frame consists of many bytes, each of which has its own address; each
2958 kind of computer has a convention for choosing one of those bytes whose
2959 address serves as the address of the frame. Usually this address is kept
2960 in a register called the @dfn{frame pointer register} while execution is
2961 going on in that frame.
2962
2963 @cindex frame number
2964 @value{GDBN} assigns numbers to all existing stack frames, starting with
2965 zero for the innermost frame, one for the frame that called it,
2966 and so on upward. These numbers do not really exist in your program;
2967 they are assigned by @value{GDBN} to give you a way of designating stack
2968 frames in @value{GDBN} commands.
2969
2970 @cindex frameless execution
2971 Some compilers provide a way to compile functions so that they operate
2972 without stack frames. (For example, the @code{@value{GCC}} option
2973 @samp{-fomit-frame-pointer} will generate functions without a frame.)
2974 This is occasionally done with heavily used library functions to save
2975 the frame setup time. @value{GDBN} has limited facilities for dealing
2976 with these function invocations. If the innermost function invocation
2977 has no stack frame, @value{GDBN} will nevertheless regard it as though
2978 it had a separate frame, which is numbered zero as usual, allowing
2979 correct tracing of the function call chain. However, @value{GDBN} has
2980 no provision for frameless functions elsewhere in the stack.
2981
2982 @node Backtrace
2983 @section Backtraces
2984
2985 A backtrace is a summary of how your program got where it is. It shows one
2986 line per frame, for many frames, starting with the currently executing
2987 frame (frame zero), followed by its caller (frame one), and on up the
2988 stack.
2989
2990 @table @code
2991 @item backtrace
2992 @itemx bt
2993 @kindex backtrace
2994 @kindex bt
2995 Print a backtrace of the entire stack: one line per frame for all
2996 frames in the stack.
2997
2998 You can stop the backtrace at any time by typing the system interrupt
2999 character, normally @kbd{C-c}.
3000
3001 @item backtrace @var{n}
3002 @itemx bt @var{n}
3003 Similar, but print only the innermost @var{n} frames.
3004
3005 @item backtrace -@var{n}
3006 @itemx bt -@var{n}
3007 Similar, but print only the outermost @var{n} frames.
3008 @end table
3009
3010 @kindex where
3011 @kindex info stack
3012 @kindex info s
3013 The names @code{where} and @code{info stack} (abbreviated @code{info s})
3014 are additional aliases for @code{backtrace}.
3015
3016 Each line in the backtrace shows the frame number and the function name.
3017 The program counter value is also shown---unless you use @code{set
3018 print address off}. The backtrace also shows the source file name and
3019 line number, as well as the arguments to the function. The program
3020 counter value is omitted if it is at the beginning of the code for that
3021 line number.
3022
3023 Here is an example of a backtrace. It was made with the command
3024 @samp{bt 3}, so it shows the innermost three frames.
3025
3026 @smallexample
3027 @group
3028 #0 m4_traceon (obs=0x24eb0, argc=1, argv=0x2b8c8)
3029 at builtin.c:993
3030 #1 0x6e38 in expand_macro (sym=0x2b600) at macro.c:242
3031 #2 0x6840 in expand_token (obs=0x0, t=177664, td=0xf7fffb08)
3032 at macro.c:71
3033 (More stack frames follow...)
3034 @end group
3035 @end smallexample
3036
3037 @noindent
3038 The display for frame zero does not begin with a program counter
3039 value, indicating that your program has stopped at the beginning of the
3040 code for line @code{993} of @code{builtin.c}.
3041
3042 @node Selection
3043 @section Selecting a frame
3044
3045 Most commands for examining the stack and other data in your program work on
3046 whichever stack frame is selected at the moment. Here are the commands for
3047 selecting a stack frame; all of them finish by printing a brief description
3048 of the stack frame just selected.
3049
3050 @table @code
3051 @item frame @var{n}
3052 @itemx f @var{n}
3053 @kindex frame
3054 @kindex f
3055 Select frame number @var{n}. Recall that frame zero is the innermost
3056 (currently executing) frame, frame one is the frame that called the
3057 innermost one, and so on. The highest-numbered frame is the one for
3058 @code{main}.
3059
3060 @item frame @var{addr}
3061 @itemx f @var{addr}
3062 Select the frame at address @var{addr}. This is useful mainly if the
3063 chaining of stack frames has been damaged by a bug, making it
3064 impossible for @value{GDBN} to assign numbers properly to all frames. In
3065 addition, this can be useful when your program has multiple stacks and
3066 switches between them.
3067
3068 @ifset SPARC
3069 On the SPARC architecture, @code{frame} needs two addresses to
3070 select an arbitrary frame: a frame pointer and a stack pointer.
3071 @c note to future updaters: this is conditioned on a flag
3072 @c FRAME_SPECIFICATION_DYADIC in the tm-*.h files, currently only used
3073 @c by SPARC, hence the specific attribution. Generalize or list all
3074 @c possibilities if more supported machines start doing this.
3075 @end ifset
3076
3077 @item up @var{n}
3078 @kindex up
3079 Move @var{n} frames up the stack. For positive numbers @var{n}, this
3080 advances toward the outermost frame, to higher frame numbers, to frames
3081 that have existed longer. @var{n} defaults to one.
3082
3083 @item down @var{n}
3084 @kindex down
3085 @kindex do
3086 Move @var{n} frames down the stack. For positive numbers @var{n}, this
3087 advances toward the innermost frame, to lower frame numbers, to frames
3088 that were created more recently. @var{n} defaults to one. You may
3089 abbreviate @code{down} as @code{do}.
3090 @end table
3091
3092 All of these commands end by printing two lines of output describing the
3093 frame. The first line shows the frame number, the function name, the
3094 arguments, and the source file and line number of execution in that
3095 frame. The second line shows the text of that source line.
3096
3097 For example:
3098 @smallexample
3099 @group
3100 (@value{GDBP}) up
3101 #1 0x22f0 in main (argc=1, argv=0xf7fffbf4, env=0xf7fffbfc)
3102 at env.c:10
3103 10 read_input_file (argv[i]);
3104 @end group
3105 @end smallexample
3106
3107 After such a printout, the @code{list} command with no arguments will
3108 print ten lines centered on the point of execution in the frame.
3109 @xref{List, ,Printing source lines}.
3110
3111 @table @code
3112 @item up-silently @var{n}
3113 @itemx down-silently @var{n}
3114 @kindex down-silently
3115 @kindex up-silently
3116 These two commands are variants of @code{up} and @code{down},
3117 respectively; they differ in that they do their work silently, without
3118 causing display of the new frame. They are intended primarily for use
3119 in @value{GDBN} command scripts, where the output might be unnecessary and
3120 distracting.
3121 @end table
3122
3123 @node Frame Info
3124 @section Information about a frame
3125
3126 There are several other commands to print information about the selected
3127 stack frame.
3128
3129 @table @code
3130 @item frame
3131 @itemx f
3132 When used without any argument, this command does not change which
3133 frame is selected, but prints a brief description of the currently
3134 selected stack frame. It can be abbreviated @code{f}. With an
3135 argument, this command is used to select a stack frame.
3136 @xref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}.
3137
3138 @item info frame
3139 @itemx info f
3140 @kindex info frame
3141 @kindex info f
3142 This command prints a verbose description of the selected stack frame,
3143 including the address of the frame, the addresses of the next frame down
3144 (called by this frame) and the next frame up (caller of this frame), the
3145 language that the source code corresponding to this frame was written in,
3146 the address of the frame's arguments, the program counter saved in it
3147 (the address of execution in the caller frame), and which registers
3148 were saved in the frame. The verbose description is useful when
3149 something has gone wrong that has made the stack format fail to fit
3150 the usual conventions.
3151
3152 @item info frame @var{addr}
3153 @itemx info f @var{addr}
3154 Print a verbose description of the frame at address @var{addr},
3155 without selecting that frame. The selected frame remains unchanged by
3156 this command.
3157
3158 @item info args
3159 @kindex info args
3160 Print the arguments of the selected frame, each on a separate line.
3161
3162 @item info locals
3163 @kindex info locals
3164 Print the local variables of the selected frame, each on a separate
3165 line. These are all variables (declared either static or automatic)
3166 accessible at the point of execution of the selected frame.
3167
3168 @ifclear CONLY
3169 @item info catch
3170 @kindex info catch
3171 @cindex catch exceptions
3172 @cindex exception handlers
3173 Print a list of all the exception handlers that are active in the
3174 current stack frame at the current point of execution. To see other
3175 exception handlers, visit the associated frame (using the @code{up},
3176 @code{down}, or @code{frame} commands); then type @code{info catch}.
3177 @xref{Exception Handling, ,Breakpoints and exceptions}.
3178 @end ifclear
3179 @end table
3180
3181 @ifset MIPS
3182 @node MIPS Stack
3183 @section MIPS machines and the function stack
3184
3185 @cindex stack on MIPS
3186 @cindex MIPS stack
3187 MIPS based computers use an unusual stack frame, which sometimes
3188 requires @value{GDBN} to search backward in the object code to find the
3189 beginning of a function.
3190
3191 @cindex response time, MIPS debugging
3192 To improve response time (especially for embedded applications, where
3193 @value{GDBN} may be restricted to a slow serial line for this search)
3194 you may want to limit the size of this search, using one of these
3195 commands:
3196 @c FIXME! So what happens when GDB does *not* find the beginning of a
3197 @c function?
3198
3199 @cindex @code{heuristic-fence-post} (MIPS)
3200 @table @code
3201 @item set heuristic-fence-post @var{limit}
3202 Restrict @var{GDBN} to examining at most @var{limit} bytes in its search
3203 for the beginning of a function. A value of @code{0} (the default)
3204 means there is no limit.
3205
3206 @item show heuristic-fence-post
3207 Display the current limit.
3208 @end table
3209
3210 @noindent
3211 These commands are available @emph{only} when @value{GDBN} is configured
3212 for debugging programs on MIPS processors.
3213 @end ifset
3214
3215 @node Source
3216 @chapter Examining Source Files
3217
3218 @value{GDBN} can print parts of your program's source, since the debugging
3219 information recorded in the program tells @value{GDBN} what source files were
3220 used to build it. When your program stops, @value{GDBN} spontaneously prints
3221 the line where it stopped. Likewise, when you select a stack frame
3222 (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}), @value{GDBN} prints the line where
3223 execution in that frame has stopped. You can print other portions of
3224 source files by explicit command.
3225
3226 @ifclear DOSHOST
3227 If you use @value{GDBN} through its GNU Emacs interface, you may prefer to use
3228 Emacs facilities to view source; @pxref{Emacs, ,Using @value{GDBN} under GNU
3229 Emacs}.
3230 @end ifclear
3231
3232 @menu
3233 * List:: Printing source lines
3234 @ifclear DOSHOST
3235 * Search:: Searching source files
3236 @end ifclear
3237
3238 * Source Path:: Specifying source directories
3239 * Machine Code:: Source and machine code
3240 @end menu
3241
3242 @node List
3243 @section Printing source lines
3244
3245 @kindex list
3246 @kindex l
3247 To print lines from a source file, use the @code{list} command
3248 (abbreviated @code{l}). There are several ways to specify what part
3249 of the file you want to print.
3250
3251 Here are the forms of the @code{list} command most commonly used:
3252
3253 @table @code
3254 @item list @var{linenum}
3255 Print lines centered around line number @var{linenum} in the
3256 current source file.
3257
3258 @item list @var{function}
3259 Print lines centered around the beginning of function
3260 @var{function}.
3261
3262 @item list
3263 Print more lines. If the last lines printed were printed with a
3264 @code{list} command, this prints lines following the last lines
3265 printed; however, if the last line printed was a solitary line printed
3266 as part of displaying a stack frame (@pxref{Stack, ,Examining the
3267 Stack}), this prints lines centered around that line.
3268
3269 @item list -
3270 Print lines just before the lines last printed.
3271 @end table
3272
3273 By default, @value{GDBN} prints ten source lines with any of these forms of
3274 the @code{list} command. You can change this using @code{set listsize}:
3275
3276 @table @code
3277 @item set listsize @var{count}
3278 @kindex set listsize
3279 Make the @code{list} command display @var{count} source lines (unless
3280 the @code{list} argument explicitly specifies some other number).
3281
3282 @item show listsize
3283 @kindex show listsize
3284 Display the number of lines that @code{list} will currently display by
3285 default.
3286 @end table
3287
3288 Repeating a @code{list} command with @key{RET} discards the argument,
3289 so it is equivalent to typing just @code{list}. This is more useful
3290 than listing the same lines again. An exception is made for an
3291 argument of @samp{-}; that argument is preserved in repetition so that
3292 each repetition moves up in the source file.
3293
3294 @cindex linespec
3295 In general, the @code{list} command expects you to supply zero, one or two
3296 @dfn{linespecs}. Linespecs specify source lines; there are several ways
3297 of writing them but the effect is always to specify some source line.
3298 Here is a complete description of the possible arguments for @code{list}:
3299
3300 @table @code
3301 @item list @var{linespec}
3302 Print lines centered around the line specified by @var{linespec}.
3303
3304 @item list @var{first},@var{last}
3305 Print lines from @var{first} to @var{last}. Both arguments are
3306 linespecs.
3307
3308 @item list ,@var{last}
3309 Print lines ending with @var{last}.
3310
3311 @item list @var{first},
3312 Print lines starting with @var{first}.
3313
3314 @item list +
3315 Print lines just after the lines last printed.
3316
3317 @item list -
3318 Print lines just before the lines last printed.
3319
3320 @item list
3321 As described in the preceding table.
3322 @end table
3323
3324 Here are the ways of specifying a single source line---all the
3325 kinds of linespec.
3326
3327 @table @code
3328 @item @var{number}
3329 Specifies line @var{number} of the current source file.
3330 When a @code{list} command has two linespecs, this refers to
3331 the same source file as the first linespec.
3332
3333 @item +@var{offset}
3334 Specifies the line @var{offset} lines after the last line printed.
3335 When used as the second linespec in a @code{list} command that has
3336 two, this specifies the line @var{offset} lines down from the
3337 first linespec.
3338
3339 @item -@var{offset}
3340 Specifies the line @var{offset} lines before the last line printed.
3341
3342 @item @var{filename}:@var{number}
3343 Specifies line @var{number} in the source file @var{filename}.
3344
3345 @item @var{function}
3346 @c FIXME: "of the open-brace" is C-centric. When we add other langs...
3347 Specifies the line of the open-brace that begins the body of the
3348 function @var{function}.
3349
3350 @item @var{filename}:@var{function}
3351 Specifies the line of the open-brace that begins the body of the
3352 function @var{function} in the file @var{filename}. You only need the
3353 file name with a function name to avoid ambiguity when there are
3354 identically named functions in different source files.
3355
3356 @item *@var{address}
3357 Specifies the line containing the program address @var{address}.
3358 @var{address} may be any expression.
3359 @end table
3360
3361 @ifclear DOSHOST
3362 @node Search
3363 @section Searching source files
3364 @cindex searching
3365 @kindex reverse-search
3366
3367 There are two commands for searching through the current source file for a
3368 regular expression.
3369
3370 @table @code
3371 @item forward-search @var{regexp}
3372 @itemx search @var{regexp}
3373 @kindex search
3374 @kindex forward-search
3375 The command @samp{forward-search @var{regexp}} checks each line,
3376 starting with the one following the last line listed, for a match for
3377 @var{regexp}. It lists the line that is found. You can use
3378 synonym @samp{search @var{regexp}} or abbreviate the command name as
3379 @code{fo}.
3380
3381 @item reverse-search @var{regexp}
3382 The command @samp{reverse-search @var{regexp}} checks each line, starting
3383 with the one before the last line listed and going backward, for a match
3384 for @var{regexp}. It lists the line that is found. You can abbreviate
3385 this command as @code{rev}.
3386 @end table
3387 @end ifclear
3388
3389 @node Source Path
3390 @section Specifying source directories
3391
3392 @cindex source path
3393 @cindex directories for source files
3394 Executable programs sometimes do not record the directories of the source
3395 files from which they were compiled, just the names. Even when they do,
3396 the directories could be moved between the compilation and your debugging
3397 session. @value{GDBN} has a list of directories to search for source files;
3398 this is called the @dfn{source path}. Each time @value{GDBN} wants a source file,
3399 it tries all the directories in the list, in the order they are present
3400 in the list, until it finds a file with the desired name. Note that
3401 the executable search path is @emph{not} used for this purpose. Neither is
3402 the current working directory, unless it happens to be in the source
3403 path.
3404
3405 If @value{GDBN} cannot find a source file in the source path, and the object
3406 program records a directory, @value{GDBN} tries that directory too. If the
3407 source path is empty, and there is no record of the compilation
3408 directory, @value{GDBN} will, as a last resort, look in the current
3409 directory.
3410
3411 Whenever you reset or rearrange the source path, @value{GDBN} will clear out
3412 any information it has cached about where source files are found, where
3413 each line is in the file, etc.
3414
3415 @kindex directory
3416 When you start @value{GDBN}, its source path is empty.
3417 To add other directories, use the @code{directory} command.
3418
3419 @table @code
3420 @item directory @var{dirname} @dots{}
3421 Add directory @var{dirname} to the front of the source path. Several
3422 directory names may be given to this command, separated by @samp{:} or
3423 whitespace. You may specify a directory that is already in the source
3424 path; this moves it forward, so it will be searched sooner.
3425
3426 You can use the string @samp{$cdir} to refer to the compilation
3427 directory (if one is recorded), and @samp{$cwd} to refer to the current
3428 working directory. @samp{$cwd} is not the same as @samp{.}---the former
3429 tracks the current working directory as it changes during your @value{GDBN}
3430 session, while the latter is immediately expanded to the current
3431 directory at the time you add an entry to the source path.
3432
3433 @item directory
3434 Reset the source path to empty again. This requires confirmation.
3435
3436 @c RET-repeat for @code{directory} is explicitly disabled, but since
3437 @c repeating it would be a no-op we do not say that. (thanks to RMS)
3438
3439 @item show directories
3440 @kindex show directories
3441 Print the source path: show which directories it contains.
3442 @end table
3443
3444 If your source path is cluttered with directories that are no longer of
3445 interest, @value{GDBN} may sometimes cause confusion by finding the wrong
3446 versions of source. You can correct the situation as follows:
3447
3448 @enumerate
3449 @item
3450 Use @code{directory} with no argument to reset the source path to empty.
3451
3452 @item
3453 Use @code{directory} with suitable arguments to reinstall the
3454 directories you want in the source path. You can add all the
3455 directories in one command.
3456 @end enumerate
3457
3458 @node Machine Code
3459 @section Source and machine code
3460
3461 You can use the command @code{info line} to map source lines to program
3462 addresses (and vice versa), and the command @code{disassemble} to display
3463 a range of addresses as machine instructions.
3464
3465 @table @code
3466 @item info line @var{linespec}
3467 @kindex info line
3468 Print the starting and ending addresses of the compiled code for
3469 source line @var{linespec}. You can specify source lines in any of
3470 the ways understood by the @code{list} command (@pxref{List, ,Printing
3471 source lines}).
3472 @end table
3473
3474 For example, we can use @code{info line} to discover the location of
3475 the object code for the first line of function
3476 @code{m4_changequote}:
3477
3478 @smallexample
3479 (@value{GDBP}) info line m4_changecom
3480 Line 895 of "builtin.c" starts at pc 0x634c and ends at 0x6350.
3481 @end smallexample
3482
3483 @noindent
3484 We can also inquire (using @code{*@var{addr}} as the form for
3485 @var{linespec}) what source line covers a particular address:
3486 @smallexample
3487 (@value{GDBP}) info line *0x63ff
3488 Line 926 of "builtin.c" starts at pc 0x63e4 and ends at 0x6404.
3489 @end smallexample
3490
3491 @cindex @code{$_} and @code{info line}
3492 After @code{info line}, the default address for the @code{x} command
3493 is changed to the starting address of the line, so that @samp{x/i} is
3494 sufficient to begin examining the machine code (@pxref{Memory,
3495 ,Examining memory}). Also, this address is saved as the value of the
3496 convenience variable @code{$_} (@pxref{Convenience Vars, ,Convenience
3497 variables}).
3498
3499 @table @code
3500 @kindex disassemble
3501 @item disassemble
3502 @cindex assembly instructions
3503 @cindex instructions, assembly
3504 @cindex machine instructions
3505 @cindex listing machine instructions
3506 This specialized command dumps a range of memory as machine
3507 instructions. The default memory range is the function surrounding the
3508 program counter of the selected frame. A single argument to this
3509 command is a program counter value; the function surrounding this value
3510 will be dumped. Two arguments specify a range of addresses (first
3511 inclusive, second exclusive) to dump.
3512 @end table
3513
3514 @ifclear H8EXCLUSIVE
3515 We can use @code{disassemble} to inspect the object code
3516 range shown in the last @code{info line} example (the example
3517 shows SPARC machine instructions):
3518
3519
3520 @smallexample
3521 (@value{GDBP}) disas 0x63e4 0x6404
3522 Dump of assembler code from 0x63e4 to 0x6404:
3523 0x63e4 <builtin_init+5340>: ble 0x63f8 <builtin_init+5360>
3524 0x63e8 <builtin_init+5344>: sethi %hi(0x4c00), %o0
3525 0x63ec <builtin_init+5348>: ld [%i1+4], %o0
3526 0x63f0 <builtin_init+5352>: b 0x63fc <builtin_init+5364>
3527 0x63f4 <builtin_init+5356>: ld [%o0+4], %o0
3528 0x63f8 <builtin_init+5360>: or %o0, 0x1a4, %o0
3529 0x63fc <builtin_init+5364>: call 0x9288 <path_search>
3530 0x6400 <builtin_init+5368>: nop
3531 End of assembler dump.
3532 @end smallexample
3533 @end ifclear
3534
3535 @ifset H8EXCLUSIVE
3536 For example, here is the beginning of the output for the
3537 disassembly of a function @code{fact}:
3538
3539
3540 @smallexample
3541 (@value{GDBP}) disas fact
3542 Dump of assembler code for function fact:
3543 to 0x808c:
3544 0x802c <fact>: 6d f2 mov.w r2,@@-r7
3545 0x802e <fact+2>: 6d f3 mov.w r3,@@-r7
3546 0x8030 <fact+4>: 6d f6 mov.w r6,@@-r7
3547 0x8032 <fact+6>: 0d 76 mov.w r7,r6
3548 0x8034 <fact+8>: 6f 70 00 08 mov.w @@(0x8,r7),r0
3549 0x8038 <fact+12> 19 11 sub.w r1,r1
3550 .
3551 .
3552 .
3553 @end smallexample
3554 @end ifset
3555
3556 @node Data
3557 @chapter Examining Data
3558
3559 @cindex printing data
3560 @cindex examining data
3561 @kindex print
3562 @kindex inspect
3563 @c "inspect" is not quite a synonym if you are using Epoch, which we do not
3564 @c document because it is nonstandard... Under Epoch it displays in a
3565 @c different window or something like that.
3566 The usual way to examine data in your program is with the @code{print}
3567 command (abbreviated @code{p}), or its synonym @code{inspect}.
3568 @ifclear CONLY
3569 It evaluates and prints the value of an expression of the language your
3570 program is written in (@pxref{Languages, ,Using @value{GDBN} with Different
3571 Languages}).
3572 @end ifclear
3573
3574 @table @code
3575 @item print @var{exp}
3576 @itemx print /@var{f} @var{exp}
3577 @var{exp} is an expression (in the source language). By default the
3578 value of @var{exp} is printed in a format appropriate to its data type;
3579 you can choose a different format by specifying @samp{/@var{f}}, where
3580 @var{f} is a letter specifying the format; @pxref{Output Formats,,Output
3581 formats}.
3582
3583 @item print
3584 @itemx print /@var{f}
3585 If you omit @var{exp}, @value{GDBN} displays the last value again (from the
3586 @dfn{value history}; @pxref{Value History, ,Value history}). This allows you to
3587 conveniently inspect the same value in an alternative format.
3588 @end table
3589
3590 A more low-level way of examining data is with the @code{x} command.
3591 It examines data in memory at a specified address and prints it in a
3592 specified format. @xref{Memory, ,Examining memory}.
3593
3594 If you are interested in information about types, or about how the fields
3595 of a struct
3596 @ifclear CONLY
3597 or class
3598 @end ifclear
3599 are declared, use the @code{ptype @var{exp}}
3600 command rather than @code{print}. @xref{Symbols, ,Examining the Symbol Table}.
3601
3602 @menu
3603 * Expressions:: Expressions
3604 * Variables:: Program variables
3605 * Arrays:: Artificial arrays
3606 * Output Formats:: Output formats
3607 * Memory:: Examining memory
3608 * Auto Display:: Automatic display
3609 * Print Settings:: Print settings
3610 * Value History:: Value history
3611 * Convenience Vars:: Convenience variables
3612 * Registers:: Registers
3613 @ifclear HAVE-FLOAT
3614 * Floating Point Hardware:: Floating point hardware
3615 @end ifclear
3616 @end menu
3617
3618 @node Expressions
3619 @section Expressions
3620
3621 @cindex expressions
3622 @code{print} and many other @value{GDBN} commands accept an expression and
3623 compute its value. Any kind of constant, variable or operator defined
3624 by the programming language you are using is valid in an expression in
3625 @value{GDBN}. This includes conditional expressions, function calls, casts
3626 and string constants. It unfortunately does not include symbols defined
3627 by preprocessor @code{#define} commands.
3628
3629 @ifclear CONLY
3630 Because C is so widespread, most of the expressions shown in examples in
3631 this manual are in C. @xref{Languages, , Using @value{GDBN} with Different
3632 Languages}, for information on how to use expressions in other
3633 languages.
3634
3635 In this section, we discuss operators that you can use in @value{GDBN}
3636 expressions regardless of your programming language.
3637
3638 Casts are supported in all languages, not just in C, because it is so
3639 useful to cast a number into a pointer so as to examine a structure
3640 at that address in memory.
3641 @c FIXME: casts supported---Mod2 true?
3642 @end ifclear
3643
3644 @value{GDBN} supports these operators in addition to those of programming
3645 languages:
3646
3647 @table @code
3648 @item @@
3649 @samp{@@} is a binary operator for treating parts of memory as arrays.
3650 @xref{Arrays, ,Artificial arrays}, for more information.
3651
3652 @item ::
3653 @samp{::} allows you to specify a variable in terms of the file or
3654 function where it is defined. @xref{Variables, ,Program variables}.
3655
3656 @item @{@var{type}@} @var{addr}
3657 @cindex @{@var{type}@}
3658 @cindex type casting memory
3659 @cindex memory, viewing as typed object
3660 @cindex casts, to view memory
3661 Refers to an object of type @var{type} stored at address @var{addr} in
3662 memory. @var{addr} may be any expression whose value is an integer or
3663 pointer (but parentheses are required around binary operators, just as in
3664 a cast). This construct is allowed regardless of what kind of data is
3665 normally supposed to reside at @var{addr}.
3666 @end table
3667
3668 @node Variables
3669 @section Program variables
3670
3671 The most common kind of expression to use is the name of a variable
3672 in your program.
3673
3674 Variables in expressions are understood in the selected stack frame
3675 (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}); they must either be global
3676 (or static) or be visible according to the scope rules of the
3677 programming language from the point of execution in that frame. This
3678 means that in the function
3679
3680 @example
3681 foo (a)
3682 int a;
3683 @{
3684 bar (a);
3685 @{
3686 int b = test ();
3687 bar (b);
3688 @}
3689 @}
3690 @end example
3691
3692 @noindent
3693 you can examine and use the variable @code{a} whenever your program is
3694 executing within the function @code{foo}, but you can only use or
3695 examine the variable @code{b} while your program is executing inside
3696 the block where @code{b} is declared.
3697
3698 @cindex variable name conflict
3699 There is an exception: you can refer to a variable or function whose
3700 scope is a single source file even if the current execution point is not
3701 in this file. But it is possible to have more than one such variable or
3702 function with the same name (in different source files). If that
3703 happens, referring to that name has unpredictable effects. If you wish,
3704 you can specify a static variable in a particular function or file,
3705 using the colon-colon notation:
3706
3707 @cindex colon-colon
3708 @iftex
3709 @c info cannot cope with a :: index entry, but why deprive hard copy readers?
3710 @kindex ::
3711 @end iftex
3712 @example
3713 @var{file}::@var{variable}
3714 @var{function}::@var{variable}
3715 @end example
3716
3717 @noindent
3718 Here @var{file} or @var{function} is the name of the context for the
3719 static @var{variable}. In the case of file names, you can use quotes to
3720 make sure @value{GDBN} parses the file name as a single word---for example,
3721 to print a global value of @code{x} defined in @file{f2.c}:
3722
3723 @example
3724 (@value{GDBP}) p 'f2.c'::x
3725 @end example
3726
3727 @ifclear CONLY
3728 @cindex C++ scope resolution
3729 This use of @samp{::} is very rarely in conflict with the very similar
3730 use of the same notation in C++. @value{GDBN} also supports use of the C++
3731 scope resolution operator in @value{GDBN} expressions.
3732 @c FIXME: Um, so what happens in one of those rare cases where it's in
3733 @c conflict?? --mew
3734 @end ifclear
3735
3736 @cindex wrong values
3737 @cindex variable values, wrong
3738 @quotation
3739 @emph{Warning:} Occasionally, a local variable may appear to have the
3740 wrong value at certain points in a function---just after entry to a new
3741 scope, and just before exit.
3742 @end quotation
3743 You may see this problem when you are stepping by machine instructions.
3744 This is because on most machines, it takes more than one instruction to
3745 set up a stack frame (including local variable definitions); if you are
3746 stepping by machine instructions, variables may appear to have the wrong
3747 values until the stack frame is completely built. On exit, it usually
3748 also takes more than one machine instruction to destroy a stack frame;
3749 after you begin stepping through that group of instructions, local
3750 variable definitions may be gone.
3751
3752 @node Arrays
3753 @section Artificial arrays
3754
3755 @cindex artificial array
3756 @kindex @@
3757 It is often useful to print out several successive objects of the
3758 same type in memory; a section of an array, or an array of
3759 dynamically determined size for which only a pointer exists in the
3760 program.
3761
3762 You can do this by referring to a contiguous span of memory as an
3763 @dfn{artificial array}, using the binary operator @samp{@@}. The left
3764 operand of @samp{@@} should be the first element of the desired array,
3765 as an individual object. The right operand should be the desired length
3766 of the array. The result is an array value whose elements are all of
3767 the type of the left argument. The first element is actually the left
3768 argument; the second element comes from bytes of memory immediately
3769 following those that hold the first element, and so on. Here is an
3770 example. If a program says
3771
3772 @example
3773 int *array = (int *) malloc (len * sizeof (int));
3774 @end example
3775
3776 @noindent
3777 you can print the contents of @code{array} with
3778
3779 @example
3780 p *array@@len
3781 @end example
3782
3783 The left operand of @samp{@@} must reside in memory. Array values made
3784 with @samp{@@} in this way behave just like other arrays in terms of
3785 subscripting, and are coerced to pointers when used in expressions.
3786 Artificial arrays most often appear in expressions via the value history
3787 (@pxref{Value History, ,Value history}), after printing one out.)
3788
3789 Sometimes the artificial array mechanism is not quite enough; in
3790 moderately complex data structures, the elements of interest may not
3791 actually be adjacent---for example, if you are interested in the values
3792 of pointers in an array. One useful work-around in this situation is
3793 to use a convenience variable (@pxref{Convenience Vars, ,Convenience
3794 variables}) as a counter in an expression that prints the first
3795 interesting value, and then repeat that expression via @key{RET}. For
3796 instance, suppose you have an array @code{dtab} of pointers to
3797 structures, and you are interested in the values of a field @code{fv}
3798 in each structure. Here is an example of what you might type:
3799
3800 @example
3801 set $i = 0
3802 p dtab[$i++]->fv
3803 @key{RET}
3804 @key{RET}
3805 @dots{}
3806 @end example
3807
3808 @node Output Formats
3809 @section Output formats
3810
3811 @cindex formatted output
3812 @cindex output formats
3813 By default, @value{GDBN} prints a value according to its data type. Sometimes
3814 this is not what you want. For example, you might want to print a number
3815 in hex, or a pointer in decimal. Or you might want to view data in memory
3816 at a certain address as a character string or as an instruction. To do
3817 these things, specify an @dfn{output format} when you print a value.
3818
3819 The simplest use of output formats is to say how to print a value
3820 already computed. This is done by starting the arguments of the
3821 @code{print} command with a slash and a format letter. The format
3822 letters supported are:
3823
3824 @table @code
3825 @item x
3826 Regard the bits of the value as an integer, and print the integer in
3827 hexadecimal.
3828
3829 @item d
3830 Print as integer in signed decimal.
3831
3832 @item u
3833 Print as integer in unsigned decimal.
3834
3835 @item o
3836 Print as integer in octal.
3837
3838 @item t
3839 Print as integer in binary. The letter @samp{t} stands for ``two''.
3840 @footnote{@samp{b} cannot be used because these format letters are also
3841 used with the @code{x} command, where @samp{b} stands for ``byte'';
3842 @pxref{Memory,,Examining memory}.}
3843
3844 @item a
3845 Print as an address, both absolute in hex and as an offset from the
3846 nearest preceding symbol. This format can be used to discover where (in
3847 what function) an unknown address is located:
3848
3849 @example
3850 (@value{GDBP}) p/a 0x54320
3851 $3 = 0x54320 <_initialize_vx+396>
3852 @end example
3853
3854 @item c
3855 Regard as an integer and print it as a character constant.
3856
3857 @item f
3858 Regard the bits of the value as a floating point number and print
3859 using typical floating point syntax.
3860 @end table
3861
3862 For example, to print the program counter in hex (@pxref{Registers}), type
3863
3864 @example
3865 p/x $pc
3866 @end example
3867
3868 @noindent
3869 Note that no space is required before the slash; this is because command
3870 names in @value{GDBN} cannot contain a slash.
3871
3872 To reprint the last value in the value history with a different format,
3873 you can use the @code{print} command with just a format and no
3874 expression. For example, @samp{p/x} reprints the last value in hex.
3875
3876 @node Memory
3877 @section Examining memory
3878
3879 You can use the command @code{x} (for ``examine'') to examine memory in
3880 any of several formats, independently of your program's data types.
3881
3882 @cindex examining memory
3883 @table @code
3884 @kindex x
3885 @item x/@var{nfu} @var{addr}
3886 @itemx x @var{addr}
3887 @itemx x
3888 Use the @code{x} command to examine memory.
3889 @end table
3890
3891 @var{n}, @var{f}, and @var{u} are all optional parameters that specify how
3892 much memory to display and how to format it; @var{addr} is an
3893 expression giving the address where you want to start displaying memory.
3894 If you use defaults for @var{nfu}, you need not type the slash @samp{/}.
3895 Several commands set convenient defaults for @var{addr}.
3896
3897 @table @r
3898 @item @var{n}, the repeat count
3899 The repeat count is a decimal integer; the default is 1. It specifies
3900 how much memory (counting by units @var{u}) to display.
3901 @c This really is **decimal**; unaffected by 'set radix' as of GDB
3902 @c 4.1.2.
3903
3904 @item @var{f}, the display format
3905 The display format is one of the formats used by @code{print},
3906 or @samp{s} (null-terminated string) or @samp{i} (machine instruction).
3907 The default is @samp{x} (hexadecimal) initially, or the format from the
3908 last time you used either @code{x} or @code{print}.
3909
3910 @item @var{u}, the unit size
3911 The unit size is any of
3912
3913 @table @code
3914 @item b
3915 Bytes.
3916 @item h
3917 Halfwords (two bytes).
3918 @item w
3919 Words (four bytes). This is the initial default.
3920 @item g
3921 Giant words (eight bytes).
3922 @end table
3923
3924 Each time you specify a unit size with @code{x}, that size becomes the
3925 default unit the next time you use @code{x}. (For the @samp{s} and
3926 @samp{i} formats, the unit size is ignored and is normally not written.)
3927
3928 @item @var{addr}, starting display address
3929 @var{addr} is the address where you want @value{GDBN} to begin displaying
3930 memory. The expression need not have a pointer value (though it may);
3931 it is always interpreted as an integer address of a byte of memory.
3932 @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}, for more information on expressions. The default for
3933 @var{addr} is usually just after the last address examined---but several
3934 other commands also set the default address: @code{info breakpoints} (to
3935 the address of the last breakpoint listed), @code{info line} (to the
3936 starting address of a line), and @code{print} (if you use it to display
3937 a value from memory).
3938 @end table
3939
3940 For example, @samp{x/3uh 0x54320} is a request to display three halfwords
3941 (@code{h}) of memory, formatted as unsigned decimal integers (@samp{u}),
3942 starting at address @code{0x54320}. @samp{x/4xw $sp} prints the four
3943 words (@samp{w}) of memory above the stack pointer (here, @samp{$sp};
3944 @pxref{Registers}) in hexadecimal (@samp{x}).
3945
3946 Since the letters indicating unit sizes are all distinct from the
3947 letters specifying output formats, you do not have to remember whether
3948 unit size or format comes first; either order will work. The output
3949 specifications @samp{4xw} and @samp{4wx} mean exactly the same thing.
3950 (However, the count @var{n} must come first; @samp{wx4} will not work.)
3951
3952 Even though the unit size @var{u} is ignored for the formats @samp{s}
3953 and @samp{i}, you might still want to use a count @var{n}; for example,
3954 @samp{3i} specifies that you want to see three machine instructions,
3955 including any operands. The command @code{disassemble} gives an
3956 alternative way of inspecting machine instructions; @pxref{Machine
3957 Code,,Source and machine code}.
3958
3959 All the defaults for the arguments to @code{x} are designed to make it
3960 easy to continue scanning memory with minimal specifications each time
3961 you use @code{x}. For example, after you have inspected three machine
3962 instructions with @samp{x/3i @var{addr}}, you can inspect the next seven
3963 with just @samp{x/7}. If you use @key{RET} to repeat the @code{x} command,
3964 the repeat count @var{n} is used again; the other arguments default as
3965 for successive uses of @code{x}.
3966
3967 @cindex @code{$_}, @code{$__}, and value history
3968 The addresses and contents printed by the @code{x} command are not saved
3969 in the value history because there is often too much of them and they
3970 would get in the way. Instead, @value{GDBN} makes these values available for
3971 subsequent use in expressions as values of the convenience variables
3972 @code{$_} and @code{$__}. After an @code{x} command, the last address
3973 examined is available for use in expressions in the convenience variable
3974 @code{$_}. The contents of that address, as examined, are available in
3975 the convenience variable @code{$__}.
3976
3977 If the @code{x} command has a repeat count, the address and contents saved
3978 are from the last memory unit printed; this is not the same as the last
3979 address printed if several units were printed on the last line of output.
3980
3981 @node Auto Display
3982 @section Automatic display
3983 @cindex automatic display
3984 @cindex display of expressions
3985
3986 If you find that you want to print the value of an expression frequently
3987 (to see how it changes), you might want to add it to the @dfn{automatic
3988 display list} so that @value{GDBN} will print its value each time your program stops.
3989 Each expression added to the list is given a number to identify it;
3990 to remove an expression from the list, you specify that number.
3991 The automatic display looks like this:
3992
3993 @example
3994 2: foo = 38
3995 3: bar[5] = (struct hack *) 0x3804
3996 @end example
3997
3998 @noindent
3999 This display shows item numbers, expressions and their current values. As with
4000 displays you request manually using @code{x} or @code{print}, you can
4001 specify the output format you prefer; in fact, @code{display} decides
4002 whether to use @code{print} or @code{x} depending on how elaborate your
4003 format specification is---it uses @code{x} if you specify a unit size,
4004 or one of the two formats (@samp{i} and @samp{s}) that are only
4005 supported by @code{x}; otherwise it uses @code{print}.
4006
4007 @table @code
4008 @item display @var{exp}
4009 @kindex display
4010 Add the expression @var{exp} to the list of expressions to display
4011 each time your program stops. @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.
4012
4013 @code{display} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after using it.
4014
4015 @item display/@var{fmt} @var{exp}
4016 For @var{fmt} specifying only a display format and not a size or
4017 count, add the expression @var{exp} to the auto-display list but
4018 arranges to display it each time in the specified format @var{fmt}.
4019 @xref{Output Formats,,Output formats}.
4020
4021 @item display/@var{fmt} @var{addr}
4022 For @var{fmt} @samp{i} or @samp{s}, or including a unit-size or a
4023 number of units, add the expression @var{addr} as a memory address to
4024 be examined each time your program stops. Examining means in effect
4025 doing @samp{x/@var{fmt} @var{addr}}. @xref{Memory, ,Examining memory}.
4026 @end table
4027
4028 For example, @samp{display/i $pc} can be helpful, to see the machine
4029 instruction about to be executed each time execution stops (@samp{$pc}
4030 is a common name for the program counter; @pxref{Registers}).
4031
4032 @table @code
4033 @item undisplay @var{dnums}@dots{}
4034 @itemx delete display @var{dnums}@dots{}
4035 @kindex delete display
4036 @kindex undisplay
4037 Remove item numbers @var{dnums} from the list of expressions to display.
4038
4039 @code{undisplay} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} after using it.
4040 (Otherwise you would just get the error @samp{No display number @dots{}}.)
4041
4042 @item disable display @var{dnums}@dots{}
4043 @kindex disable display
4044 Disable the display of item numbers @var{dnums}. A disabled display
4045 item is not printed automatically, but is not forgotten. It may be
4046 enabled again later.
4047
4048 @item enable display @var{dnums}@dots{}
4049 @kindex enable display
4050 Enable display of item numbers @var{dnums}. It becomes effective once
4051 again in auto display of its expression, until you specify otherwise.
4052
4053 @item display
4054 Display the current values of the expressions on the list, just as is
4055 done when your program stops.
4056
4057 @item info display
4058 @kindex info display
4059 Print the list of expressions previously set up to display
4060 automatically, each one with its item number, but without showing the
4061 values. This includes disabled expressions, which are marked as such.
4062 It also includes expressions which would not be displayed right now
4063 because they refer to automatic variables not currently available.
4064 @end table
4065
4066 If a display expression refers to local variables, then it does not make
4067 sense outside the lexical context for which it was set up. Such an
4068 expression is disabled when execution enters a context where one of its
4069 variables is not defined. For example, if you give the command
4070 @code{display last_char} while inside a function with an argument
4071 @code{last_char}, then this argument will be displayed while your program
4072 continues to stop inside that function. When it stops elsewhere---where
4073 there is no variable @code{last_char}---display is disabled. The next time
4074 your program stops where @code{last_char} is meaningful, you can enable the
4075 display expression once again.
4076
4077 @node Print Settings
4078 @section Print settings
4079
4080 @cindex format options
4081 @cindex print settings
4082 @value{GDBN} provides the following ways to control how arrays, structures,
4083 and symbols are printed.
4084
4085 @noindent
4086 These settings are useful for debugging programs in any language:
4087
4088 @table @code
4089 @item set print address
4090 @item set print address on
4091 @kindex set print address
4092 @value{GDBN} will print memory addresses showing the location of stack
4093 traces, structure values, pointer values, breakpoints, and so forth,
4094 even when it also displays the contents of those addresses. The default
4095 is on. For example, this is what a stack frame display looks like, with
4096 @code{set print address on}:
4097
4098 @smallexample
4099 @group
4100 (@value{GDBP}) f
4101 #0 set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<<", rq=0x34c88 ">>")
4102 at input.c:530
4103 530 if (lquote != def_lquote)
4104 @end group
4105 @end smallexample
4106
4107 @item set print address off
4108 Do not print addresses when displaying their contents. For example,
4109 this is the same stack frame displayed with @code{set print address off}:
4110
4111 @example
4112 @group
4113 (@value{GDBP}) set print addr off
4114 (@value{GDBP}) f
4115 #0 set_quotes (lq="<<", rq=">>") at input.c:530
4116 530 if (lquote != def_lquote)
4117 @end group
4118 @end example
4119
4120 You can use @samp{set print address off} to eliminate all machine
4121 dependent displays from the @value{GDBN} interface. For example, with
4122 @code{print address off}, you should get the same text for backtraces on
4123 all machines---whether or not they involve pointer arguments.
4124
4125 @item show print address
4126 @kindex show print address
4127 Show whether or not addresses are to be printed.
4128
4129 @item set print array
4130 @itemx set print array on
4131 @kindex set print array
4132 @value{GDBN} will pretty-print arrays. This format is more convenient to read,
4133 but uses more space. The default is off.
4134
4135 @item set print array off
4136 Return to compressed format for arrays.
4137
4138 @item show print array
4139 @kindex show print array
4140 Show whether compressed or pretty format is selected for displaying
4141 arrays.
4142
4143 @item set print elements @var{number-of-elements}
4144 @kindex set print elements
4145 If @value{GDBN} is printing a large array, it will stop printing after it has
4146 printed the number of elements set by the @code{set print elements} command.
4147 This limit also applies to the display of strings.
4148 Setting the number of elements to zero means that the printing is unlimited.
4149
4150 @item show print elements
4151 @kindex show print elements
4152 Display the number of elements of a large array that @value{GDBN} will print
4153 before losing patience.
4154
4155 @item set print pretty on
4156 @kindex set print pretty
4157 Cause @value{GDBN} to print structures in an indented format with one member per
4158 line, like this:
4159
4160 @example
4161 @group
4162 $1 = @{
4163 next = 0x0,
4164 flags = @{
4165 sweet = 1,
4166 sour = 1
4167 @},
4168 meat = 0x54 "Pork"
4169 @}
4170 @end group
4171 @end example
4172
4173 @item set print pretty off
4174 Cause @value{GDBN} to print structures in a compact format, like this:
4175
4176 @smallexample
4177 @group
4178 $1 = @{next = 0x0, flags = @{sweet = 1, sour = 1@}, \
4179 meat = 0x54 "Pork"@}
4180 @end group
4181 @end smallexample
4182
4183 @noindent
4184 This is the default format.
4185
4186 @item show print pretty
4187 @kindex show print pretty
4188 Show which format @value{GDBN} will use to print structures.
4189
4190 @item set print sevenbit-strings on
4191 @kindex set print sevenbit-strings
4192 Print using only seven-bit characters; if this option is set,
4193 @value{GDBN} will display any eight-bit characters (in strings or character
4194 values) using the notation @code{\}@var{nnn}. For example, @kbd{M-a} is
4195 displayed as @code{\341}.
4196
4197 @item set print sevenbit-strings off
4198 Print using either seven-bit or eight-bit characters, as required. This
4199 is the default.
4200
4201 @item show print sevenbit-strings
4202 @kindex show print sevenbit-strings
4203 Show whether or not @value{GDBN} will print only seven-bit characters.
4204
4205 @item set print union on
4206 @kindex set print union
4207 Tell @value{GDBN} to print unions which are contained in structures. This is the
4208 default setting.
4209
4210 @item set print union off
4211 Tell @value{GDBN} not to print unions which are contained in structures.
4212
4213 @item show print union
4214 @kindex show print union
4215 Ask @value{GDBN} whether or not it will print unions which are contained in
4216 structures.
4217
4218 For example, given the declarations
4219
4220 @smallexample
4221 typedef enum @{Tree, Bug@} Species;
4222 typedef enum @{Big_tree, Acorn, Seedling@} Tree_forms;
4223 typedef enum @{Caterpillar, Cocoon, Butterfly@}
4224 Bug_forms;
4225
4226 struct thing @{
4227 Species it;
4228 union @{
4229 Tree_forms tree;
4230 Bug_forms bug;
4231 @} form;
4232 @};
4233
4234 struct thing foo = @{Tree, @{Acorn@}@};
4235 @end smallexample
4236
4237 @noindent
4238 with @code{set print union on} in effect @samp{p foo} would print
4239
4240 @smallexample
4241 $1 = @{it = Tree, form = @{tree = Acorn, bug = Cocoon@}@}
4242 @end smallexample
4243
4244 @noindent
4245 and with @code{set print union off} in effect it would print
4246
4247 @smallexample
4248 $1 = @{it = Tree, form = @{...@}@}
4249 @end smallexample
4250
4251 @item set print max-symbolic-offset @var{maxoff}
4252 @kindex set print max-symbolic-offset
4253 Tell @value{GDBN} to only display the symbolic form of an address if the
4254 offset between the closest earlier symbol and the address is less than
4255 @var{maxoff}. The default is 0, which means to always print the
4256 symbolic form of an address, if any symbol precedes it.
4257
4258 @item show print max-symbolic-offset
4259 @kindex show print max-symbolic-offset
4260 Ask how large the maximum offset is that @value{GDBN} will print in a
4261 symbolic address.
4262
4263 @item set print symbol-filename on
4264 @kindex set print symbol-filename
4265 Tell @value{GDBN} to print the source filename and linenumber of a symbol
4266 in the symbolic form of an address.
4267
4268 @item set print symbol-filename off
4269 Do not print source filename and linenumber of a symbol. This is the default.
4270
4271 @item show print symbol-filename
4272 @kindex show print symbol-filename
4273 Show whether or not @value{GDBN} will print the source filename and linenumber
4274 of a symbol in the symbolic form of an address.
4275
4276 @end table
4277
4278 @ifclear CONLY
4279 @noindent
4280 These settings are of interest when debugging C++ programs:
4281
4282 @table @code
4283 @item set print demangle
4284 @itemx set print demangle on
4285 @kindex set print demangle
4286 Print C++ names in their source form rather than in the encoded
4287 (``mangled'') form passed to the assembler and linker for type-safe
4288 linkage. The default is @samp{on}.
4289
4290 @item show print demangle
4291 @kindex show print demangle
4292 Show whether C++ names will be printed in mangled or demangled form.
4293
4294 @item set print asm-demangle
4295 @itemx set print asm-demangle on
4296 @kindex set print asm-demangle
4297 Print C++ names in their source form rather than their mangled form, even
4298 in assembler code printouts such as instruction disassemblies.
4299 The default is off.
4300
4301 @item show print asm-demangle
4302 @kindex show print asm-demangle
4303 Show whether C++ names in assembly listings will be printed in mangled
4304 or demangled form.
4305
4306 @item set demangle-style @var{style}
4307 @kindex set demangle-style
4308 @cindex C++ symbol decoding style
4309 @cindex symbol decoding style, C++
4310 Choose among several encoding schemes used by different compilers to
4311 represent C++ names. The choices for @var{style} are currently:
4312
4313 @table @code
4314 @item auto
4315 Allow @value{GDBN} to choose a decoding style by inspecting your program.
4316
4317 @item gnu
4318 Decode based on the GNU C++ compiler (@code{g++}) encoding algorithm.
4319
4320 @item lucid
4321 Decode based on the Lucid C++ compiler (@code{lcc}) encoding algorithm.
4322
4323 @item arm
4324 Decode using the algorithm in the @cite{C++ Annotated Reference Manual}.
4325 @strong{Warning:} this setting alone is not sufficient to allow
4326 debugging @code{cfront}-generated executables. @value{GDBN} would
4327 require further enhancement to permit that.
4328 @end table
4329
4330 @item show demangle-style
4331 @kindex show demangle-style
4332 Display the encoding style currently in use for decoding C++ symbols.
4333
4334 @item set print object
4335 @itemx set print object on
4336 @kindex set print object
4337 When displaying a pointer to an object, identify the @emph{actual}
4338 (derived) type of the object rather than the @emph{declared} type, using
4339 the virtual function table.
4340
4341 @item set print object off
4342 Display only the declared type of objects, without reference to the
4343 virtual function table. This is the default setting.
4344
4345 @item show print object
4346 @kindex show print object
4347 Show whether actual, or declared, object types will be displayed.
4348
4349 @item set print vtbl
4350 @itemx set print vtbl on
4351 @kindex set print vtbl
4352 Pretty print C++ virtual function tables. The default is off.
4353
4354 @item set print vtbl off
4355 Do not pretty print C++ virtual function tables.
4356
4357 @item show print vtbl
4358 @kindex show print vtbl
4359 Show whether C++ virtual function tables are pretty printed, or not.
4360 @end table
4361 @end ifclear
4362
4363 @node Value History
4364 @section Value history
4365
4366 @cindex value history
4367 Values printed by the @code{print} command are saved in the @value{GDBN} @dfn{value
4368 history} so that you can refer to them in other expressions. Values are
4369 kept until the symbol table is re-read or discarded (for example with
4370 the @code{file} or @code{symbol-file} commands). When the symbol table
4371 changes, the value history is discarded, since the values may contain
4372 pointers back to the types defined in the symbol table.
4373
4374 @cindex @code{$}
4375 @cindex @code{$$}
4376 @cindex history number
4377 The values printed are given @dfn{history numbers} for you to refer to them
4378 by. These are successive integers starting with one. @code{print} shows you
4379 the history number assigned to a value by printing @samp{$@var{num} = }
4380 before the value; here @var{num} is the history number.
4381
4382 To refer to any previous value, use @samp{$} followed by the value's
4383 history number. The way @code{print} labels its output is designed to
4384 remind you of this. Just @code{$} refers to the most recent value in
4385 the history, and @code{$$} refers to the value before that.
4386 @code{$$@var{n}} refers to the @var{n}th value from the end; @code{$$2}
4387 is the value just prior to @code{$$}, @code{$$1} is equivalent to
4388 @code{$$}, and @code{$$0} is equivalent to @code{$}.
4389
4390 For example, suppose you have just printed a pointer to a structure and
4391 want to see the contents of the structure. It suffices to type
4392
4393 @example
4394 p *$
4395 @end example
4396
4397 If you have a chain of structures where the component @code{next} points
4398 to the next one, you can print the contents of the next one with this:
4399
4400 @example
4401 p *$.next
4402 @end example
4403
4404 @noindent
4405 You can print successive links in the chain by repeating this
4406 command---which you can do by just typing @key{RET}.
4407
4408 Note that the history records values, not expressions. If the value of
4409 @code{x} is 4 and you type these commands:
4410
4411 @example
4412 print x
4413 set x=5
4414 @end example
4415
4416 @noindent
4417 then the value recorded in the value history by the @code{print} command
4418 remains 4 even though the value of @code{x} has changed.
4419
4420 @table @code
4421 @kindex show values
4422 @item show values
4423 Print the last ten values in the value history, with their item numbers.
4424 This is like @samp{p@ $$9} repeated ten times, except that @code{show
4425 values} does not change the history.
4426
4427 @item show values @var{n}
4428 Print ten history values centered on history item number @var{n}.
4429
4430 @item show values +
4431 Print ten history values just after the values last printed. If no more
4432 values are available, produces no display.
4433 @end table
4434
4435 Pressing @key{RET} to repeat @code{show values @var{n}} has exactly the
4436 same effect as @samp{show values +}.
4437
4438 @node Convenience Vars
4439 @section Convenience variables
4440
4441 @cindex convenience variables
4442 @value{GDBN} provides @dfn{convenience variables} that you can use within
4443 @value{GDBN} to hold on to a value and refer to it later. These variables
4444 exist entirely within @value{GDBN}; they are not part of your program, and
4445 setting a convenience variable has no direct effect on further execution
4446 of your program. That is why you can use them freely.
4447
4448 Convenience variables are prefixed with @samp{$}. Any name preceded by
4449 @samp{$} can be used for a convenience variable, unless it is one of
4450 the predefined machine-specific register names (@pxref{Registers}).
4451 (Value history references, in contrast, are @emph{numbers} preceded
4452 by @samp{$}. @xref{Value History, ,Value history}.)
4453
4454 You can save a value in a convenience variable with an assignment
4455 expression, just as you would set a variable in your program.
4456 For example:
4457
4458 @example
4459 set $foo = *object_ptr
4460 @end example
4461
4462 @noindent
4463 would save in @code{$foo} the value contained in the object pointed to by
4464 @code{object_ptr}.
4465
4466 Using a convenience variable for the first time creates it; but its value
4467 is @code{void} until you assign a new value. You can alter the value with
4468 another assignment at any time.
4469
4470 Convenience variables have no fixed types. You can assign a convenience
4471 variable any type of value, including structures and arrays, even if
4472 that variable already has a value of a different type. The convenience
4473 variable, when used as an expression, has the type of its current value.
4474
4475 @table @code
4476 @item show convenience
4477 @kindex show convenience
4478 Print a list of convenience variables used so far, and their values.
4479 Abbreviated @code{show con}.
4480 @end table
4481
4482 One of the ways to use a convenience variable is as a counter to be
4483 incremented or a pointer to be advanced. For example, to print
4484 a field from successive elements of an array of structures:
4485
4486 @example
4487 set $i = 0
4488 print bar[$i++]->contents
4489 @i{@dots{} repeat that command by typing @key{RET}.}
4490 @end example
4491
4492 Some convenience variables are created automatically by @value{GDBN} and given
4493 values likely to be useful.
4494
4495 @table @code
4496 @item $_
4497 @kindex $_
4498 The variable @code{$_} is automatically set by the @code{x} command to
4499 the last address examined (@pxref{Memory, ,Examining memory}). Other
4500 commands which provide a default address for @code{x} to examine also
4501 set @code{$_} to that address; these commands include @code{info line}
4502 and @code{info breakpoint}. The type of @code{$_} is @code{void *}
4503 except when set by the @code{x} command, in which case it is a pointer
4504 to the type of @code{$__}.
4505
4506 @item $__
4507 @kindex $__
4508 The variable @code{$__} is automatically set by the @code{x} command
4509 to the value found in the last address examined. Its type is chosen
4510 to match the format in which the data was printed.
4511 @end table
4512
4513 @node Registers
4514 @section Registers
4515
4516 @cindex registers
4517 You can refer to machine register contents, in expressions, as variables
4518 with names starting with @samp{$}. The names of registers are different
4519 for each machine; use @code{info registers} to see the names used on
4520 your machine.
4521
4522 @table @code
4523 @item info registers
4524 @kindex info registers
4525 Print the names and values of all registers except floating-point
4526 registers (in the selected stack frame).
4527
4528 @item info all-registers
4529 @kindex info all-registers
4530 @cindex floating point registers
4531 Print the names and values of all registers, including floating-point
4532 registers.
4533
4534 @item info registers @var{regname} @dots{}
4535 Print the relativized value of each specified register @var{regname}.
4536 @var{regname} may be any register name valid on the machine you are using, with
4537 or without the initial @samp{$}.
4538 @end table
4539
4540 @value{GDBN} has four ``standard'' register names that are available (in
4541 expressions) on most machines---whenever they do not conflict with an
4542 architecture's canonical mnemonics for registers. The register names
4543 @code{$pc} and @code{$sp} are used for the program counter register and
4544 the stack pointer. @code{$fp} is used for a register that contains a
4545 pointer to the current stack frame, and @code{$ps} is used for a
4546 register that contains the processor status. For example,
4547 you could print the program counter in hex with
4548
4549 @example
4550 p/x $pc
4551 @end example
4552
4553 @noindent
4554 or print the instruction to be executed next with
4555
4556 @example
4557 x/i $pc
4558 @end example
4559
4560 @noindent
4561 or add four to the stack pointer@footnote{This is a way of removing
4562 one word from the stack, on machines where stacks grow downward in
4563 memory (most machines, nowadays). This assumes that the innermost
4564 stack frame is selected; setting @code{$sp} is not allowed when other
4565 stack frames are selected. To pop entire frames off the stack,
4566 regardless of machine architecture, use @code{return};
4567 @pxref{Returning, ,Returning from a function}.} with
4568
4569 @example
4570 set $sp += 4
4571 @end example
4572
4573 Whenever possible, these four standard register names are available on
4574 your machine even though the machine has different canonical mnemonics,
4575 so long as there is no conflict. The @code{info registers} command
4576 shows the canonical names. For example, on the SPARC, @code{info
4577 registers} displays the processor status register as @code{$psr} but you
4578 can also refer to it as @code{$ps}.
4579
4580 @value{GDBN} always considers the contents of an ordinary register as an
4581 integer when the register is examined in this way. Some machines have
4582 special registers which can hold nothing but floating point; these
4583 registers are considered to have floating point values. There is no way
4584 to refer to the contents of an ordinary register as floating point value
4585 (although you can @emph{print} it as a floating point value with
4586 @samp{print/f $@var{regname}}).
4587
4588 Some registers have distinct ``raw'' and ``virtual'' data formats. This
4589 means that the data format in which the register contents are saved by
4590 the operating system is not the same one that your program normally
4591 sees. For example, the registers of the 68881 floating point
4592 coprocessor are always saved in ``extended'' (raw) format, but all C
4593 programs expect to work with ``double'' (virtual) format. In such
4594 cases, @value{GDBN} normally works with the virtual format only (the format that
4595 makes sense for your program), but the @code{info registers} command
4596 prints the data in both formats.
4597
4598 Normally, register values are relative to the selected stack frame
4599 (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}). This means that you get the
4600 value that the register would contain if all stack frames farther in
4601 were exited and their saved registers restored. In order to see the
4602 true contents of hardware registers, you must select the innermost
4603 frame (with @samp{frame 0}).
4604
4605 However, @value{GDBN} must deduce where registers are saved, from the machine
4606 code generated by your compiler. If some registers are not saved, or if
4607 @value{GDBN} is unable to locate the saved registers, the selected stack
4608 frame will make no difference.
4609
4610 @ifset AMD29K
4611 @table @code
4612 @item set rstack_high_address @var{address}
4613 @kindex set rstack_high_address
4614 @cindex AMD 29K register stack
4615 @cindex register stack, AMD29K
4616 On AMD 29000 family processors, registers are saved in a separate
4617 ``register stack''. There is no way for @value{GDBN} to determine the extent
4618 of this stack. Normally, @value{GDBN} just assumes that the stack is ``large
4619 enough''. This may result in @value{GDBN} referencing memory locations that
4620 do not exist. If necessary, you can get around this problem by
4621 specifying the ending address of the register stack with the @code{set
4622 rstack_high_address} command. The argument should be an address, which
4623 you will probably want to precede with @samp{0x} to specify in
4624 hexadecimal.
4625
4626 @item show rstack_high_address
4627 @kindex show rstack_high_address
4628 Display the current limit of the register stack, on AMD 29000 family
4629 processors.
4630 @end table
4631 @end ifset
4632
4633 @ifclear HAVE-FLOAT
4634 @node Floating Point Hardware
4635 @section Floating point hardware
4636 @cindex floating point
4637
4638 @c FIXME! Really host, not target?
4639 Depending on the host machine architecture, @value{GDBN} may be able to give
4640 you more information about the status of the floating point hardware.
4641
4642 @table @code
4643 @item info float
4644 @kindex info float
4645 Display hardware-dependent information about the floating
4646 point unit. The exact contents and layout vary depending on the
4647 floating point chip; on some platforms, @samp{info float} is not
4648 available at all.
4649 @end table
4650 @c FIXME: this is a cop-out. Try to get examples, explanations. Only
4651 @c FIXME...supported currently on arm's and 386's. Mark properly with
4652 @c FIXME... m4 macros to isolate general statements from hardware-dep,
4653 @c FIXME... at that point.
4654 @end ifclear
4655
4656 @ifclear CONLY
4657 @node Languages
4658 @chapter Using @value{GDBN} with Different Languages
4659 @cindex languages
4660
4661 Although programming languages generally have common aspects, they are
4662 rarely expressed in the same manner. For instance, in ANSI C,
4663 dereferencing a pointer @code{p} is accomplished by @code{*p}, but in
4664 Modula-2, it is accomplished by @code{p^}. Values can also be
4665 represented (and displayed) differently. Hex numbers in C are written
4666 like @samp{0x1ae}, while in Modula-2 they appear as @samp{1AEH}.
4667
4668 @cindex working language
4669 Language-specific information is built into @value{GDBN} for some languages,
4670 allowing you to express operations like the above in your program's
4671 native language, and allowing @value{GDBN} to output values in a manner
4672 consistent with the syntax of your program's native language. The
4673 language you use to build expressions, called the @dfn{working
4674 language}, can be selected manually, or @value{GDBN} can set it
4675 automatically.
4676
4677 @menu
4678 * Setting:: Switching between source languages
4679 * Show:: Displaying the language
4680 * Checks:: Type and range checks
4681 * Support:: Supported languages
4682 @end menu
4683
4684 @node Setting
4685 @section Switching between source languages
4686
4687 There are two ways to control the working language---either have @value{GDBN}
4688 set it automatically, or select it manually yourself. You can use the
4689 @code{set language} command for either purpose. On startup, @value{GDBN}
4690 defaults to setting the language automatically.
4691
4692 @menu
4693 * Manually:: Setting the working language manually
4694 * Automatically:: Having @value{GDBN} infer the source language
4695 @end menu
4696
4697 @node Manually
4698 @subsection Setting the working language
4699
4700 If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically,
4701 expressions are interpreted the same way in your debugging session and
4702 your program.
4703
4704 @kindex set language
4705 If you wish, you may set the language manually. To do this, issue the
4706 command @samp{set language @var{lang}}, where @var{lang} is the name of
4707 a language, such as @code{c} or @code{modula-2}. For a list of the supported
4708 languages, type @samp{set language}.
4709 @c FIXME: rms: eventually this command should be "help set language".
4710
4711 Setting the language manually prevents @value{GDBN} from updating the working
4712 language automatically. This can lead to confusion if you try
4713 to debug a program when the working language is not the same as the
4714 source language, when an expression is acceptable to both
4715 languages---but means different things. For instance, if the current
4716 source file were written in C, and @value{GDBN} was parsing Modula-2, a
4717 command such as:
4718
4719 @example
4720 print a = b + c
4721 @end example
4722
4723 @noindent
4724 might not have the effect you intended. In C, this means to add
4725 @code{b} and @code{c} and place the result in @code{a}. The result
4726 printed would be the value of @code{a}. In Modula-2, this means to compare
4727 @code{a} to the result of @code{b+c}, yielding a @code{BOOLEAN} value.
4728
4729 @node Automatically
4730 @subsection Having @value{GDBN} infer the source language
4731
4732 To have @value{GDBN} set the working language automatically, use @samp{set
4733 language local} or @samp{set language auto}. @value{GDBN} then infers the
4734 language that a program was written in by looking at the name of its
4735 source files, and examining their extensions:
4736
4737 @table @file
4738 @item *.mod
4739 Modula-2 source file
4740
4741 @item *.c
4742 C source file
4743
4744 @item *.C
4745 @itemx *.cc
4746 C++ source file
4747 @end table
4748
4749 This information is recorded for each function or procedure in a source
4750 file. When your program stops in a frame (usually by encountering a
4751 breakpoint), @value{GDBN} sets the working language to the language recorded
4752 for the function in that frame. If the language for a frame is unknown
4753 (that is, if the function or block corresponding to the frame was
4754 defined in a source file that does not have a recognized extension), the
4755 current working language is not changed, and @value{GDBN} issues a warning.
4756
4757 This may not seem necessary for most programs, which are written
4758 entirely in one source language. However, program modules and libraries
4759 written in one source language can be used by a main program written in
4760 a different source language. Using @samp{set language auto} in this
4761 case frees you from having to set the working language manually.
4762
4763 @node Show
4764 @section Displaying the language
4765
4766 The following commands will help you find out which language is the
4767 working language, and also what language source files were written in.
4768
4769 @kindex show language
4770 @kindex info frame
4771 @kindex info source
4772 @table @code
4773 @item show language
4774 Display the current working language. This is the
4775 language you can use with commands such as @code{print} to
4776 build and compute expressions that may involve variables in your program.
4777
4778 @item info frame
4779 Among the other information listed here (@pxref{Frame Info, ,Information
4780 about a frame}) is the source language for this frame. This is the
4781 language that will become the working language if you ever use an
4782 identifier that is in this frame.
4783
4784 @item info source
4785 Among the other information listed here (@pxref{Symbols, ,Examining the
4786 Symbol Table}) is the source language of this source file.
4787 @end table
4788
4789 @node Checks
4790 @section Type and range checking
4791
4792 @quotation
4793 @emph{Warning:} In this release, the @value{GDBN} commands for type and range
4794 checking are included, but they do not yet have any effect. This
4795 section documents the intended facilities.
4796 @end quotation
4797 @c FIXME remove warning when type/range code added
4798
4799 Some languages are designed to guard you against making seemingly common
4800 errors through a series of compile- and run-time checks. These include
4801 checking the type of arguments to functions and operators, and making
4802 sure mathematical overflows are caught at run time. Checks such as
4803 these help to ensure a program's correctness once it has been compiled
4804 by eliminating type mismatches, and providing active checks for range
4805 errors when your program is running.
4806
4807 @value{GDBN} can check for conditions like the above if you wish.
4808 Although @value{GDBN} will not check the statements in your program, it
4809 can check expressions entered directly into @value{GDBN} for evaluation via
4810 the @code{print} command, for example. As with the working language,
4811 @value{GDBN} can also decide whether or not to check automatically based on
4812 your program's source language. @xref{Support, ,Supported languages},
4813 for the default settings of supported languages.
4814
4815 @menu
4816 * Type Checking:: An overview of type checking
4817 * Range Checking:: An overview of range checking
4818 @end menu
4819
4820 @cindex type checking
4821 @cindex checks, type
4822 @node Type Checking
4823 @subsection An overview of type checking
4824
4825 Some languages, such as Modula-2, are strongly typed, meaning that the
4826 arguments to operators and functions have to be of the correct type,
4827 otherwise an error occurs. These checks prevent type mismatch
4828 errors from ever causing any run-time problems. For example,
4829
4830 @example
4831 1 + 2 @result{} 3
4832 @exdent but
4833 @error{} 1 + 2.3
4834 @end example
4835
4836 The second example fails because the @code{CARDINAL} 1 is not
4837 type-compatible with the @code{REAL} 2.3.
4838
4839 For expressions you use in @value{GDBN} commands, you can tell the @value{GDBN}
4840 type checker to skip checking; to treat any mismatches as errors and
4841 abandon the expression; or only issue warnings when type mismatches
4842 occur, but evaluate the expression anyway. When you choose the last of
4843 these, @value{GDBN} evaluates expressions like the second example above, but
4844 also issues a warning.
4845
4846 Even though you may turn type checking off, other type-based reasons may
4847 prevent @value{GDBN} from evaluating an expression. For instance, @value{GDBN} does not
4848 know how to add an @code{int} and a @code{struct foo}. These particular
4849 type errors have nothing to do with the language in use, and usually
4850 arise from expressions, such as the one described above, which make
4851 little sense to evaluate anyway.
4852
4853 Each language defines to what degree it is strict about type. For
4854 instance, both Modula-2 and C require the arguments to arithmetical
4855 operators to be numbers. In C, enumerated types and pointers can be
4856 represented as numbers, so that they are valid arguments to mathematical
4857 operators. @xref{Support, ,Supported languages}, for further
4858 details on specific languages.
4859
4860 @value{GDBN} provides some additional commands for controlling the type checker:
4861
4862 @kindex set check
4863 @kindex set check type
4864 @kindex show check type
4865 @table @code
4866 @item set check type auto
4867 Set type checking on or off based on the current working language.
4868 @xref{Support, ,Supported languages}, for the default settings for
4869 each language.
4870
4871 @item set check type on
4872 @itemx set check type off
4873 Set type checking on or off, overriding the default setting for the
4874 current working language. Issue a warning if the setting does not
4875 match the language default. If any type mismatches occur in
4876 evaluating an expression while typechecking is on, @value{GDBN} prints a
4877 message and aborts evaluation of the expression.
4878
4879 @item set check type warn
4880 Cause the type checker to issue warnings, but to always attempt to
4881 evaluate the expression. Evaluating the expression may still
4882 be impossible for other reasons. For example, @value{GDBN} cannot add
4883 numbers and structures.
4884
4885 @item show type
4886 Show the current setting of the type checker, and whether or not @value{GDBN} is
4887 setting it automatically.
4888 @end table
4889
4890 @cindex range checking
4891 @cindex checks, range
4892 @node Range Checking
4893 @subsection An overview of range checking
4894
4895 In some languages (such as Modula-2), it is an error to exceed the
4896 bounds of a type; this is enforced with run-time checks. Such range
4897 checking is meant to ensure program correctness by making sure
4898 computations do not overflow, or indices on an array element access do
4899 not exceed the bounds of the array.
4900
4901 For expressions you use in @value{GDBN} commands, you can tell
4902 @value{GDBN} to treat range errors in one of three ways: ignore them,
4903 always treat them as errors and abandon the expression, or issue
4904 warnings but evaluate the expression anyway.
4905
4906 A range error can result from numerical overflow, from exceeding an
4907 array index bound, or when you type a constant that is not a member
4908 of any type. Some languages, however, do not treat overflows as an
4909 error. In many implementations of C, mathematical overflow causes the
4910 result to ``wrap around'' to lower values---for example, if @var{m} is
4911 the largest integer value, and @var{s} is the smallest, then
4912
4913 @example
4914 @var{m} + 1 @result{} @var{s}
4915 @end example
4916
4917 This, too, is specific to individual languages, and in some cases
4918 specific to individual compilers or machines. @xref{Support, ,
4919 Supported languages}, for further details on specific languages.
4920
4921 @value{GDBN} provides some additional commands for controlling the range checker:
4922
4923 @kindex set check
4924 @kindex set check range
4925 @kindex show check range
4926 @table @code
4927 @item set check range auto
4928 Set range checking on or off based on the current working language.
4929 @xref{Support, ,Supported languages}, for the default settings for
4930 each language.
4931
4932 @item set check range on
4933 @itemx set check range off
4934 Set range checking on or off, overriding the default setting for the
4935 current working language. A warning is issued if the setting does not
4936 match the language default. If a range error occurs, then a message
4937 is printed and evaluation of the expression is aborted.
4938
4939 @item set check range warn
4940 Output messages when the @value{GDBN} range checker detects a range error,
4941 but attempt to evaluate the expression anyway. Evaluating the
4942 expression may still be impossible for other reasons, such as accessing
4943 memory that the process does not own (a typical example from many UNIX
4944 systems).
4945
4946 @item show range
4947 Show the current setting of the range checker, and whether or not it is
4948 being set automatically by @value{GDBN}.
4949 @end table
4950
4951 @node Support
4952 @section Supported languages
4953
4954 @value{GDBN} 4 supports C, C++, and Modula-2. Some @value{GDBN}
4955 features may be used in expressions regardless of the language you
4956 use: the @value{GDBN} @code{@@} and @code{::} operators, and the
4957 @samp{@{type@}addr} construct (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}) can be
4958 used with the constructs of any of the supported languages.
4959
4960 The following sections detail to what degree each of these
4961 source languages is supported by @value{GDBN}. These sections are
4962 not meant to be language tutorials or references, but serve only as a
4963 reference guide to what the @value{GDBN} expression parser will accept, and
4964 what input and output formats should look like for different languages.
4965 There are many good books written on each of these languages; please
4966 look to these for a language reference or tutorial.
4967
4968 @menu
4969 * C:: C and C++
4970 * Modula-2:: Modula-2
4971 @end menu
4972
4973 @node C
4974 @subsection C and C++
4975 @cindex C and C++
4976 @cindex expressions in C or C++
4977
4978 Since C and C++ are so closely related, many features of @value{GDBN} apply
4979 to both languages. Whenever this is the case, we discuss both languages
4980 together.
4981
4982 @cindex C++
4983 @kindex g++
4984 @cindex GNU C++
4985 The C++ debugging facilities are jointly implemented by the GNU C++
4986 compiler and @value{GDBN}. Therefore, to debug your C++ code effectively,
4987 you must compile your C++ programs with the GNU C++ compiler,
4988 @code{g++}.
4989 @end ifclear
4990 @ifset CONLY
4991 @node C
4992 @chapter C Language Support
4993 @cindex C language
4994 @cindex expressions in C
4995
4996 Information specific to the C language is built into @value{GDBN} so that you
4997 can use C expressions while degugging. This also permits @value{GDBN} to
4998 output values in a manner consistent with C conventions.
4999
5000 @menu
5001 * C Operators:: C operators
5002 * C Constants:: C constants
5003 * Debugging C:: @value{GDBN} and C
5004 @end menu
5005 @end ifset
5006 @ifclear CONLY
5007 @menu
5008 * C Operators:: C and C++ operators
5009 * C Constants:: C and C++ constants
5010 * Cplus expressions:: C++ expressions
5011 * C Defaults:: Default settings for C and C++
5012 * C Checks:: C and C++ type and range checks
5013 * Debugging C:: @value{GDBN} and C
5014 * Debugging C plus plus:: Special features for C++
5015 @end menu
5016 @end ifclear
5017
5018 @ifclear CONLY
5019 @cindex C and C++ operators
5020 @node C Operators
5021 @subsubsection C and C++ operators
5022 @end ifclear
5023 @ifset CONLY
5024 @cindex C operators
5025 @node C Operators
5026 @section C operators
5027 @end ifset
5028
5029 Operators must be defined on values of specific types. For instance,
5030 @code{+} is defined on numbers, but not on structures. Operators are
5031 often defined on groups of types.
5032
5033 @ifclear CONLY
5034 For the purposes of C and C++, the following definitions hold:
5035 @end ifclear
5036
5037 @itemize @bullet
5038 @item
5039 @emph{Integral types} include @code{int} with any of its storage-class
5040 specifiers; @code{char}; and @code{enum}.
5041
5042 @item
5043 @emph{Floating-point types} include @code{float} and @code{double}.
5044
5045 @item
5046 @emph{Pointer types} include all types defined as @code{(@var{type}
5047 *)}.
5048
5049 @item
5050 @emph{Scalar types} include all of the above.
5051 @end itemize
5052
5053 @noindent
5054 The following operators are supported. They are listed here
5055 in order of increasing precedence:
5056
5057 @table @code
5058 @item ,
5059 The comma or sequencing operator. Expressions in a comma-separated list
5060 are evaluated from left to right, with the result of the entire
5061 expression being the last expression evaluated.
5062
5063 @item =
5064 Assignment. The value of an assignment expression is the value
5065 assigned. Defined on scalar types.
5066
5067 @item @var{op}=
5068 Used in an expression of the form @w{@code{@var{a} @var{op}= @var{b}}},
5069 and translated to @w{@code{@var{a} = @var{a op b}}}.
5070 @w{@code{@var{op}=}} and @code{=} have the same precendence.
5071 @var{op} is any one of the operators @code{|}, @code{^}, @code{&},
5072 @code{<<}, @code{>>}, @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{*}, @code{/}, @code{%}.
5073
5074 @item ?:
5075 The ternary operator. @code{@var{a} ? @var{b} : @var{c}} can be thought
5076 of as: if @var{a} then @var{b} else @var{c}. @var{a} should be of an
5077 integral type.
5078
5079 @item ||
5080 Logical @sc{or}. Defined on integral types.
5081
5082 @item &&
5083 Logical @sc{and}. Defined on integral types.
5084
5085 @item |
5086 Bitwise @sc{or}. Defined on integral types.
5087
5088 @item ^
5089 Bitwise exclusive-@sc{or}. Defined on integral types.
5090
5091 @item &
5092 Bitwise @sc{and}. Defined on integral types.
5093
5094 @item ==@r{, }!=
5095 Equality and inequality. Defined on scalar types. The value of these
5096 expressions is 0 for false and non-zero for true.
5097
5098 @item <@r{, }>@r{, }<=@r{, }>=
5099 Less than, greater than, less than or equal, greater than or equal.
5100 Defined on scalar types. The value of these expressions is 0 for false
5101 and non-zero for true.
5102
5103 @item <<@r{, }>>
5104 left shift, and right shift. Defined on integral types.
5105
5106 @item @@
5107 The @value{GDBN} ``artificial array'' operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}).
5108
5109 @item +@r{, }-
5110 Addition and subtraction. Defined on integral types, floating-point types and
5111 pointer types.
5112
5113 @item *@r{, }/@r{, }%
5114 Multiplication, division, and modulus. Multiplication and division are
5115 defined on integral and floating-point types. Modulus is defined on
5116 integral types.
5117
5118 @item ++@r{, }--
5119 Increment and decrement. When appearing before a variable, the
5120 operation is performed before the variable is used in an expression;
5121 when appearing after it, the variable's value is used before the
5122 operation takes place.
5123
5124 @item *
5125 Pointer dereferencing. Defined on pointer types. Same precedence as
5126 @code{++}.
5127
5128 @item &
5129 Address operator. Defined on variables. Same precedence as @code{++}.
5130
5131 @ifclear CONLY
5132 For debugging C++, @value{GDBN} implements a use of @samp{&} beyond what is
5133 allowed in the C++ language itself: you can use @samp{&(&@var{ref})}
5134 (or, if you prefer, simply @samp{&&@var{ref}} to examine the address
5135 where a C++ reference variable (declared with @samp{&@var{ref}}) is
5136 stored.
5137 @end ifclear
5138
5139 @item -
5140 Negative. Defined on integral and floating-point types. Same
5141 precedence as @code{++}.
5142
5143 @item !
5144 Logical negation. Defined on integral types. Same precedence as
5145 @code{++}.
5146
5147 @item ~
5148 Bitwise complement operator. Defined on integral types. Same precedence as
5149 @code{++}.
5150
5151
5152 @item .@r{, }->
5153 Structure member, and pointer-to-structure member. For convenience,
5154 @value{GDBN} regards the two as equivalent, choosing whether to dereference a
5155 pointer based on the stored type information.
5156 Defined on @code{struct} and @code{union} data.
5157
5158 @item []
5159 Array indexing. @code{@var{a}[@var{i}]} is defined as
5160 @code{*(@var{a}+@var{i})}. Same precedence as @code{->}.
5161
5162 @item ()
5163 Function parameter list. Same precedence as @code{->}.
5164
5165 @ifclear CONLY
5166 @item ::
5167 C++ scope resolution operator. Defined on
5168 @code{struct}, @code{union}, and @code{class} types.
5169 @end ifclear
5170
5171 @item ::
5172 Doubled colons
5173 @ifclear CONLY
5174 also
5175 @end ifclear
5176 represent the @value{GDBN} scope operator (@pxref{Expressions,
5177 ,Expressions}).
5178 @ifclear CONLY
5179 Same precedence as @code{::}, above.
5180 @end ifclear
5181 @end table
5182
5183 @ifclear CONLY
5184 @cindex C and C++ constants
5185 @node C Constants
5186 @subsubsection C and C++ constants
5187
5188 @value{GDBN} allows you to express the constants of C and C++ in the
5189 following ways:
5190 @end ifclear
5191 @ifset CONLY
5192 @cindex C constants
5193 @node C Constants
5194 @section C constants
5195
5196 @value{GDBN} allows you to express the constants of C in the
5197 following ways:
5198 @end ifset
5199
5200 @itemize @bullet
5201 @item
5202 Integer constants are a sequence of digits. Octal constants are
5203 specified by a leading @samp{0} (ie. zero), and hexadecimal constants by
5204 a leading @samp{0x} or @samp{0X}. Constants may also end with a letter
5205 @samp{l}, specifying that the constant should be treated as a
5206 @code{long} value.
5207
5208 @item
5209 Floating point constants are a sequence of digits, followed by a decimal
5210 point, followed by a sequence of digits, and optionally followed by an
5211 exponent. An exponent is of the form:
5212 @samp{@w{e@r{[[}+@r{]|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}}}, where @var{nnn} is another
5213 sequence of digits. The @samp{+} is optional for positive exponents.
5214
5215 @item
5216 Enumerated constants consist of enumerated identifiers, or their
5217 integral equivalents.
5218
5219 @item
5220 Character constants are a single character surrounded by single quotes
5221 (@code{'}), or a number---the ordinal value of the corresponding character
5222 (usually its @sc{ASCII} value). Within quotes, the single character may
5223 be represented by a letter or by @dfn{escape sequences}, which are of
5224 the form @samp{\@var{nnn}}, where @var{nnn} is the octal representation
5225 of the character's ordinal value; or of the form @samp{\@var{x}}, where
5226 @samp{@var{x}} is a predefined special character---for example,
5227 @samp{\n} for newline.
5228
5229 @item
5230 String constants are a sequence of character constants surrounded
5231 by double quotes (@code{"}).
5232
5233 @item
5234 Pointer constants are an integral value. You can also write pointers
5235 to constants using the C operator @samp{&}.
5236
5237 @item
5238 Array constants are comma-separated lists surrounded by braces @samp{@{}
5239 and @samp{@}}; for example, @samp{@{1,2,3@}} is a three-element array of
5240 integers, @samp{@{@{1,2@}, @{3,4@}, @{5,6@}@}} is a three-by-two array,
5241 and @samp{@{&"hi", &"there", &"fred"@}} is a three-element array of pointers.
5242 @end itemize
5243
5244 @ifclear CONLY
5245 @node Cplus expressions
5246 @subsubsection C++ expressions
5247
5248 @cindex expressions in C++
5249 @value{GDBN} expression handling has a number of extensions to
5250 interpret a significant subset of C++ expressions.
5251
5252 @cindex C++ support, not in @sc{coff}
5253 @cindex @sc{coff} versus C++
5254 @cindex C++ and object formats
5255 @cindex object formats and C++
5256 @cindex a.out and C++
5257 @cindex @sc{ecoff} and C++
5258 @cindex @sc{xcoff} and C++
5259 @cindex @sc{elf}/stabs and C++
5260 @cindex @sc{elf}/@sc{dwarf} and C++
5261 @quotation
5262 @emph{Warning:} Most of these extensions depend on the use of additional
5263 debugging information in the symbol table, and thus require a rich,
5264 extendable object code format. In particular, if your system uses
5265 a.out, MIPS @sc{ecoff}, RS/6000 @sc{xcoff}, or Sun @sc{elf} with stabs
5266 extensions to the symbol table, these facilities are all available.
5267 Where the object code format is standard @sc{coff}, on the other hand,
5268 most of the C++ support in @value{GDBN} will @emph{not} work, nor can it.
5269 For the standard SVr4 debugging format, @sc{dwarf} in @sc{elf}, the
5270 standard is still evolving, so the C++ support in @value{GDBN} is still
5271 fragile; when this debugging format stabilizes, however, C++ support
5272 will also be available on systems that use it.
5273 @end quotation
5274
5275 @enumerate
5276
5277 @cindex member functions
5278 @item
5279 Member function calls are allowed; you can use expressions like
5280
5281 @example
5282 count = aml->GetOriginal(x, y)
5283 @end example
5284
5285 @kindex this
5286 @cindex namespace in C++
5287 @item
5288 While a member function is active (in the selected stack frame), your
5289 expressions have the same namespace available as the member function;
5290 that is, @value{GDBN} allows implicit references to the class instance
5291 pointer @code{this} following the same rules as C++.
5292
5293 @cindex call overloaded functions
5294 @cindex type conversions in C++
5295 @item
5296 You can call overloaded functions; @value{GDBN} will resolve the function
5297 call to the right definition, with one restriction---you must use
5298 arguments of the type required by the function that you want to call.
5299 @value{GDBN} will not perform conversions requiring constructors or
5300 user-defined type operators.
5301
5302 @cindex reference declarations
5303 @item
5304 @value{GDBN} understands variables declared as C++ references; you can use them in
5305 expressions just as you do in C++ source---they are automatically
5306 dereferenced.
5307
5308 In the parameter list shown when @value{GDBN} displays a frame, the values of
5309 reference variables are not displayed (unlike other variables); this
5310 avoids clutter, since references are often used for large structures.
5311 The @emph{address} of a reference variable is always shown, unless
5312 you have specified @samp{set print address off}.
5313
5314 @item
5315 @value{GDBN} supports the C++ name resolution operator @code{::}---your
5316 expressions can use it just as expressions in your program do. Since
5317 one scope may be defined in another, you can use @code{::} repeatedly if
5318 necessary, for example in an expression like
5319 @samp{@var{scope1}::@var{scope2}::@var{name}}. @value{GDBN} also allows
5320 resolving name scope by reference to source files, in both C and C++
5321 debugging (@pxref{Variables, ,Program variables}).
5322 @end enumerate
5323
5324 @node C Defaults
5325 @subsubsection C and C++ defaults
5326 @cindex C and C++ defaults
5327
5328 If you allow @value{GDBN} to set type and range checking automatically, they
5329 both default to @code{off} whenever the working language changes to
5330 C or C++. This happens regardless of whether you, or @value{GDBN},
5331 selected the working language.
5332
5333 If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically, it sets the
5334 working language to C or C++ on entering code compiled from a source file
5335 whose name ends with @file{.c}, @file{.C}, or @file{.cc}.
5336 @xref{Automatically, ,Having @value{GDBN} infer the source language}, for
5337 further details.
5338
5339 @node C Checks
5340 @subsubsection C and C++ type and range checks
5341 @cindex C and C++ checks
5342
5343 By default, when @value{GDBN} parses C or C++ expressions, type checking
5344 is not used. However, if you turn type checking on, @value{GDBN} will
5345 consider two variables type equivalent if:
5346
5347 @itemize @bullet
5348 @item
5349 The two variables are structured and have the same structure, union, or
5350 enumerated tag.
5351
5352 @item
5353 Two two variables have the same type name, or types that have been
5354 declared equivalent through @code{typedef}.
5355
5356 @ignore
5357 @c leaving this out because neither J Gilmore nor R Pesch understand it.
5358 @c FIXME--beers?
5359 @item
5360 The two @code{struct}, @code{union}, or @code{enum} variables are
5361 declared in the same declaration. (Note: this may not be true for all C
5362 compilers.)
5363 @end ignore
5364 @end itemize
5365
5366 Range checking, if turned on, is done on mathematical operations. Array
5367 indices are not checked, since they are often used to index a pointer
5368 that is not itself an array.
5369 @end ifclear
5370
5371 @ifclear CONLY
5372 @node Debugging C
5373 @subsubsection @value{GDBN} and C
5374 @end ifclear
5375 @ifset CONLY
5376 @node Debugging C
5377 @section @value{GDBN} and C
5378 @end ifset
5379
5380 The @code{set print union} and @code{show print union} commands apply to
5381 the @code{union} type. When set to @samp{on}, any @code{union} that is
5382 inside a @code{struct}
5383 @ifclear CONLY
5384 or @code{class}
5385 @end ifclear
5386 will also be printed.
5387 Otherwise, it will appear as @samp{@{...@}}.
5388
5389 The @code{@@} operator aids in the debugging of dynamic arrays, formed
5390 with pointers and a memory allocation function. @xref{Expressions,
5391 ,Expressions}.
5392
5393 @ifclear CONLY
5394 @node Debugging C plus plus
5395 @subsubsection @value{GDBN} features for C++
5396
5397 @cindex commands for C++
5398 Some @value{GDBN} commands are particularly useful with C++, and some are
5399 designed specifically for use with C++. Here is a summary:
5400
5401 @table @code
5402 @cindex break in overloaded functions
5403 @item @r{breakpoint menus}
5404 When you want a breakpoint in a function whose name is overloaded,
5405 @value{GDBN} breakpoint menus help you specify which function definition
5406 you want. @xref{Breakpoint Menus,,Breakpoint menus}.
5407
5408 @cindex overloading in C++
5409 @item rbreak @var{regex}
5410 Setting breakpoints using regular expressions is helpful for setting
5411 breakpoints on overloaded functions that are not members of any special
5412 classes.
5413 @xref{Set Breaks, ,Setting breakpoints}.
5414
5415 @cindex C++ exception handling
5416 @item catch @var{exceptions}
5417 @itemx info catch
5418 Debug C++ exception handling using these commands. @xref{Exception
5419 Handling, ,Breakpoints and exceptions}.
5420
5421 @cindex inheritance
5422 @item ptype @var{typename}
5423 Print inheritance relationships as well as other information for type
5424 @var{typename}.
5425 @xref{Symbols, ,Examining the Symbol Table}.
5426
5427 @cindex C++ symbol display
5428 @item set print demangle
5429 @itemx show print demangle
5430 @itemx set print asm-demangle
5431 @itemx show print asm-demangle
5432 Control whether C++ symbols display in their source form, both when
5433 displaying code as C++ source and when displaying disassemblies.
5434 @xref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}.
5435
5436 @item set print object
5437 @itemx show print object
5438 Choose whether to print derived (actual) or declared types of objects.
5439 @xref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}.
5440
5441 @item set print vtbl
5442 @itemx show print vtbl
5443 Control the format for printing virtual function tables.
5444 @xref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}.
5445
5446 @item @r{Overloaded symbol names}
5447 You can specify a particular definition of an overloaded symbol, using
5448 the same notation that is used to declare such symbols in C++: type
5449 @code{@var{symbol}(@var{types})} rather than just @var{symbol}. You can
5450 also use the @value{GDBN} command-line word completion facilities to list the
5451 available choices, or to finish the type list for you.
5452 @xref{Completion,, Command completion}, for details on how to do this.
5453 @end table
5454
5455 @node Modula-2
5456 @subsection Modula-2
5457 @cindex Modula-2
5458
5459 The extensions made to @value{GDBN} to support Modula-2 only support
5460 output from the GNU Modula-2 compiler (which is currently being
5461 developed). Other Modula-2 compilers are not currently supported, and
5462 attempting to debug executables produced by them will most likely
5463 result in an error as @value{GDBN} reads in the executable's symbol
5464 table.
5465
5466 @cindex expressions in Modula-2
5467 @menu
5468 * M2 Operators:: Built-in operators
5469 * Built-In Func/Proc:: Built-in functions and procedures
5470 * M2 Constants:: Modula-2 constants
5471 * M2 Defaults:: Default settings for Modula-2
5472 * Deviations:: Deviations from standard Modula-2
5473 * M2 Checks:: Modula-2 type and range checks
5474 * M2 Scope:: The scope operators @code{::} and @code{.}
5475 * GDB/M2:: @value{GDBN} and Modula-2
5476 @end menu
5477
5478 @node M2 Operators
5479 @subsubsection Operators
5480 @cindex Modula-2 operators
5481
5482 Operators must be defined on values of specific types. For instance,
5483 @code{+} is defined on numbers, but not on structures. Operators are
5484 often defined on groups of types. For the purposes of Modula-2, the
5485 following definitions hold:
5486
5487 @itemize @bullet
5488
5489 @item
5490 @emph{Integral types} consist of @code{INTEGER}, @code{CARDINAL}, and
5491 their subranges.
5492
5493 @item
5494 @emph{Character types} consist of @code{CHAR} and its subranges.
5495
5496 @item
5497 @emph{Floating-point types} consist of @code{REAL}.
5498
5499 @item
5500 @emph{Pointer types} consist of anything declared as @code{POINTER TO
5501 @var{type}}.
5502
5503 @item
5504 @emph{Scalar types} consist of all of the above.
5505
5506 @item
5507 @emph{Set types} consist of @code{SET} and @code{BITSET} types.
5508
5509 @item
5510 @emph{Boolean types} consist of @code{BOOLEAN}.
5511 @end itemize
5512
5513 @noindent
5514 The following operators are supported, and appear in order of
5515 increasing precedence:
5516
5517 @table @code
5518 @item ,
5519 Function argument or array index separator.
5520
5521 @item :=
5522 Assignment. The value of @var{var} @code{:=} @var{value} is
5523 @var{value}.
5524
5525 @item <@r{, }>
5526 Less than, greater than on integral, floating-point, or enumerated
5527 types.
5528
5529 @item <=@r{, }>=
5530 Less than, greater than, less than or equal to, greater than or equal to
5531 on integral, floating-point and enumerated types, or set inclusion on
5532 set types. Same precedence as @code{<}.
5533
5534 @item =@r{, }<>@r{, }#
5535 Equality and two ways of expressing inequality, valid on scalar types.
5536 Same precedence as @code{<}. In @value{GDBN} scripts, only @code{<>} is
5537 available for inequality, since @code{#} conflicts with the script
5538 comment character.
5539
5540 @item IN
5541 Set membership. Defined on set types and the types of their members.
5542 Same precedence as @code{<}.
5543
5544 @item OR
5545 Boolean disjunction. Defined on boolean types.
5546
5547 @item AND@r{, }&
5548 Boolean conjuction. Defined on boolean types.
5549
5550 @item @@
5551 The @value{GDBN} ``artificial array'' operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}).
5552
5553 @item +@r{, }-
5554 Addition and subtraction on integral and floating-point types, or union
5555 and difference on set types.
5556
5557 @item *
5558 Multiplication on integral and floating-point types, or set intersection
5559 on set types.
5560
5561 @item /
5562 Division on floating-point types, or symmetric set difference on set
5563 types. Same precedence as @code{*}.
5564
5565 @item DIV@r{, }MOD
5566 Integer division and remainder. Defined on integral types. Same
5567 precedence as @code{*}.
5568
5569 @item -
5570 Negative. Defined on @code{INTEGER} and @code{REAL} data.
5571
5572 @item ^
5573 Pointer dereferencing. Defined on pointer types.
5574
5575 @item NOT
5576 Boolean negation. Defined on boolean types. Same precedence as
5577 @code{^}.
5578
5579 @item .
5580 @code{RECORD} field selector. Defined on @code{RECORD} data. Same
5581 precedence as @code{^}.
5582
5583 @item []
5584 Array indexing. Defined on @code{ARRAY} data. Same precedence as @code{^}.
5585
5586 @item ()
5587 Procedure argument list. Defined on @code{PROCEDURE} objects. Same precedence
5588 as @code{^}.
5589
5590 @item ::@r{, }.
5591 @value{GDBN} and Modula-2 scope operators.
5592 @end table
5593
5594 @quotation
5595 @emph{Warning:} Sets and their operations are not yet supported, so @value{GDBN}
5596 will treat the use of the operator @code{IN}, or the use of operators
5597 @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{*}, @code{/}, @code{=}, , @code{<>}, @code{#},
5598 @code{<=}, and @code{>=} on sets as an error.
5599 @end quotation
5600
5601 @cindex Modula-2 built-ins
5602 @node Built-In Func/Proc
5603 @subsubsection Built-in functions and procedures
5604
5605 Modula-2 also makes available several built-in procedures and functions.
5606 In describing these, the following metavariables are used:
5607
5608 @table @var
5609
5610 @item a
5611 represents an @code{ARRAY} variable.
5612
5613 @item c
5614 represents a @code{CHAR} constant or variable.
5615
5616 @item i
5617 represents a variable or constant of integral type.
5618
5619 @item m
5620 represents an identifier that belongs to a set. Generally used in the
5621 same function with the metavariable @var{s}. The type of @var{s} should
5622 be @code{SET OF @var{mtype}} (where @var{mtype} is the type of @var{m}.
5623
5624 @item n
5625 represents a variable or constant of integral or floating-point type.
5626
5627 @item r
5628 represents a variable or constant of floating-point type.
5629
5630 @item t
5631 represents a type.
5632
5633 @item v
5634 represents a variable.
5635
5636 @item x
5637 represents a variable or constant of one of many types. See the
5638 explanation of the function for details.
5639 @end table
5640
5641 All Modula-2 built-in procedures also return a result, described below.
5642
5643 @table @code
5644 @item ABS(@var{n})
5645 Returns the absolute value of @var{n}.
5646
5647 @item CAP(@var{c})
5648 If @var{c} is a lower case letter, it returns its upper case
5649 equivalent, otherwise it returns its argument
5650
5651 @item CHR(@var{i})
5652 Returns the character whose ordinal value is @var{i}.
5653
5654 @item DEC(@var{v})
5655 Decrements the value in the variable @var{v}. Returns the new value.
5656
5657 @item DEC(@var{v},@var{i})
5658 Decrements the value in the variable @var{v} by @var{i}. Returns the
5659 new value.
5660
5661 @item EXCL(@var{m},@var{s})
5662 Removes the element @var{m} from the set @var{s}. Returns the new
5663 set.
5664
5665 @item FLOAT(@var{i})
5666 Returns the floating point equivalent of the integer @var{i}.
5667
5668 @item HIGH(@var{a})
5669 Returns the index of the last member of @var{a}.
5670
5671 @item INC(@var{v})
5672 Increments the value in the variable @var{v}. Returns the new value.
5673
5674 @item INC(@var{v},@var{i})
5675 Increments the value in the variable @var{v} by @var{i}. Returns the
5676 new value.
5677
5678 @item INCL(@var{m},@var{s})
5679 Adds the element @var{m} to the set @var{s} if it is not already
5680 there. Returns the new set.
5681
5682 @item MAX(@var{t})
5683 Returns the maximum value of the type @var{t}.
5684
5685 @item MIN(@var{t})
5686 Returns the minimum value of the type @var{t}.
5687
5688 @item ODD(@var{i})
5689 Returns boolean TRUE if @var{i} is an odd number.
5690
5691 @item ORD(@var{x})
5692 Returns the ordinal value of its argument. For example, the ordinal
5693 value of a character is its ASCII value (on machines supporting the
5694 ASCII character set). @var{x} must be of an ordered type, which include
5695 integral, character and enumerated types.
5696
5697 @item SIZE(@var{x})
5698 Returns the size of its argument. @var{x} can be a variable or a type.
5699
5700 @item TRUNC(@var{r})
5701 Returns the integral part of @var{r}.
5702
5703 @item VAL(@var{t},@var{i})
5704 Returns the member of the type @var{t} whose ordinal value is @var{i}.
5705 @end table
5706
5707 @quotation
5708 @emph{Warning:} Sets and their operations are not yet supported, so
5709 @value{GDBN} will treat the use of procedures @code{INCL} and @code{EXCL} as
5710 an error.
5711 @end quotation
5712
5713 @cindex Modula-2 constants
5714 @node M2 Constants
5715 @subsubsection Constants
5716
5717 @value{GDBN} allows you to express the constants of Modula-2 in the following
5718 ways:
5719
5720 @itemize @bullet
5721
5722 @item
5723 Integer constants are simply a sequence of digits. When used in an
5724 expression, a constant is interpreted to be type-compatible with the
5725 rest of the expression. Hexadecimal integers are specified by a
5726 trailing @samp{H}, and octal integers by a trailing @samp{B}.
5727
5728 @item
5729 Floating point constants appear as a sequence of digits, followed by a
5730 decimal point and another sequence of digits. An optional exponent can
5731 then be specified, in the form @samp{E@r{[}+@r{|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}}, where
5732 @samp{@r{[}+@r{|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}} is the desired exponent. All of the
5733 digits of the floating point constant must be valid decimal (base 10)
5734 digits.
5735
5736 @item
5737 Character constants consist of a single character enclosed by a pair of
5738 like quotes, either single (@code{'}) or double (@code{"}). They may
5739 also be expressed by their ordinal value (their ASCII value, usually)
5740 followed by a @samp{C}.
5741
5742 @item
5743 String constants consist of a sequence of characters enclosed by a
5744 pair of like quotes, either single (@code{'}) or double (@code{"}).
5745 Escape sequences in the style of C are also allowed. @xref{C
5746 Constants, ,C and C++ constants}, for a brief explanation of escape
5747 sequences.
5748
5749 @item
5750 Enumerated constants consist of an enumerated identifier.
5751
5752 @item
5753 Boolean constants consist of the identifiers @code{TRUE} and
5754 @code{FALSE}.
5755
5756 @item
5757 Pointer constants consist of integral values only.
5758
5759 @item
5760 Set constants are not yet supported.
5761 @end itemize
5762
5763 @node M2 Defaults
5764 @subsubsection Modula-2 defaults
5765 @cindex Modula-2 defaults
5766
5767 If type and range checking are set automatically by @value{GDBN}, they
5768 both default to @code{on} whenever the working language changes to
5769 Modula-2. This happens regardless of whether you, or @value{GDBN},
5770 selected the working language.
5771
5772 If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically, then entering
5773 code compiled from a file whose name ends with @file{.mod} will set the
5774 working language to Modula-2. @xref{Automatically, ,Having @value{GDBN} set
5775 the language automatically}, for further details.
5776
5777 @node Deviations
5778 @subsubsection Deviations from standard Modula-2
5779 @cindex Modula-2, deviations from
5780
5781 A few changes have been made to make Modula-2 programs easier to debug.
5782 This is done primarily via loosening its type strictness:
5783
5784 @itemize @bullet
5785 @item
5786 Unlike in standard Modula-2, pointer constants can be formed by
5787 integers. This allows you to modify pointer variables during
5788 debugging. (In standard Modula-2, the actual address contained in a
5789 pointer variable is hidden from you; it can only be modified
5790 through direct assignment to another pointer variable or expression that
5791 returned a pointer.)
5792
5793 @item
5794 C escape sequences can be used in strings and characters to represent
5795 non-printable characters. @value{GDBN} will print out strings with these
5796 escape sequences embedded. Single non-printable characters are
5797 printed using the @samp{CHR(@var{nnn})} format.
5798
5799 @item
5800 The assignment operator (@code{:=}) returns the value of its right-hand
5801 argument.
5802
5803 @item
5804 All built-in procedures both modify @emph{and} return their argument.
5805 @end itemize
5806
5807 @node M2 Checks
5808 @subsubsection Modula-2 type and range checks
5809 @cindex Modula-2 checks
5810
5811 @quotation
5812 @emph{Warning:} in this release, @value{GDBN} does not yet perform type or
5813 range checking.
5814 @end quotation
5815 @c FIXME remove warning when type/range checks added
5816
5817 @value{GDBN} considers two Modula-2 variables type equivalent if:
5818
5819 @itemize @bullet
5820 @item
5821 They are of types that have been declared equivalent via a @code{TYPE
5822 @var{t1} = @var{t2}} statement
5823
5824 @item
5825 They have been declared on the same line. (Note: This is true of the
5826 GNU Modula-2 compiler, but it may not be true of other compilers.)
5827 @end itemize
5828
5829 As long as type checking is enabled, any attempt to combine variables
5830 whose types are not equivalent is an error.
5831
5832 Range checking is done on all mathematical operations, assignment, array
5833 index bounds, and all built-in functions and procedures.
5834
5835 @node M2 Scope
5836 @subsubsection The scope operators @code{::} and @code{.}
5837 @cindex scope
5838 @kindex .
5839 @cindex colon, doubled as scope operator
5840 @ifinfo
5841 @kindex colon-colon
5842 @c Info cannot handle :: but TeX can.
5843 @end ifinfo
5844 @iftex
5845 @kindex ::
5846 @end iftex
5847
5848 There are a few subtle differences between the Modula-2 scope operator
5849 (@code{.}) and the @value{GDBN} scope operator (@code{::}). The two have
5850 similar syntax:
5851
5852 @example
5853
5854 @var{module} . @var{id}
5855 @var{scope} :: @var{id}
5856 @end example
5857
5858 @noindent
5859 where @var{scope} is the name of a module or a procedure,
5860 @var{module} the name of a module, and @var{id} is any declared
5861 identifier within your program, except another module.
5862
5863 Using the @code{::} operator makes @value{GDBN} search the scope
5864 specified by @var{scope} for the identifier @var{id}. If it is not
5865 found in the specified scope, then @value{GDBN} will search all scopes
5866 enclosing the one specified by @var{scope}.
5867
5868 Using the @code{.} operator makes @value{GDBN} search the current scope for
5869 the identifier specified by @var{id} that was imported from the
5870 definition module specified by @var{module}. With this operator, it is
5871 an error if the identifier @var{id} was not imported from definition
5872 module @var{module}, or if @var{id} is not an identifier in
5873 @var{module}.
5874
5875 @node GDB/M2
5876 @subsubsection @value{GDBN} and Modula-2
5877
5878 Some @value{GDBN} commands have little use when debugging Modula-2 programs.
5879 Five subcommands of @code{set print} and @code{show print} apply
5880 specifically to C and C++: @samp{vtbl}, @samp{demangle},
5881 @samp{asm-demangle}, @samp{object}, and @samp{union}. The first four
5882 apply to C++, and the last to the C @code{union} type, which has no direct
5883 analogue in Modula-2.
5884
5885 The @code{@@} operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}), while available
5886 while using any language, is not useful with Modula-2. Its
5887 intent is to aid the debugging of @dfn{dynamic arrays}, which cannot be
5888 created in Modula-2 as they can in C or C++. However, because an
5889 address can be specified by an integral constant, the construct
5890 @samp{@{@var{type}@}@var{adrexp}} is still useful. (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions})
5891
5892 @cindex @code{#} in Modula-2
5893 In @value{GDBN} scripts, the Modula-2 inequality operator @code{#} is
5894 interpreted as the beginning of a comment. Use @code{<>} instead.
5895
5896 @end ifclear
5897
5898 @node Symbols
5899 @chapter Examining the Symbol Table
5900
5901 The commands described in this section allow you to inquire about the
5902 symbols (names of variables, functions and types) defined in your
5903 program. This information is inherent in the text of your program and
5904 does not change as your program executes. @value{GDBN} finds it in your
5905 program's symbol table, in the file indicated when you started @value{GDBN}
5906 (@pxref{File Options, ,Choosing files}), or by one of the
5907 file-management commands (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}).
5908
5909 @c FIXME! This might be intentionally specific to C and C++; if so, move
5910 @c to someplace in C section of lang chapter.
5911 @cindex symbol names
5912 @cindex names of symbols
5913 @cindex quoting names
5914 Occasionally, you may need to refer to symbols that contain unusual
5915 characters, which @value{GDBN} ordinarily treats as word delimiters. The
5916 most frequent case is in referring to static variables in other
5917 source files (@pxref{Variables,,Program variables}). File names
5918 are recorded in object files as debugging symbols, but @value{GDBN} would
5919 ordinarily parse a typical file name, like @file{foo.c}, as the three words
5920 @samp{foo} @samp{.} @samp{c}. To allow @value{GDBN} to recognize
5921 @samp{foo.c} as a single symbol, enclose it in single quotes; for example,
5922
5923 @example
5924 p 'foo.c'::x
5925 @end example
5926
5927 @noindent
5928 looks up the value of @code{x} in the scope of the file @file{foo.c}.
5929
5930 @table @code
5931 @item info address @var{symbol}
5932 @kindex info address
5933 Describe where the data for @var{symbol} is stored. For a register
5934 variable, this says which register it is kept in. For a non-register
5935 local variable, this prints the stack-frame offset at which the variable
5936 is always stored.
5937
5938 Note the contrast with @samp{print &@var{symbol}}, which does not work
5939 at all for a register variables, and for a stack local variable prints
5940 the exact address of the current instantiation of the variable.
5941
5942 @item whatis @var{exp}
5943 @kindex whatis
5944 Print the data type of expression @var{exp}. @var{exp} is not
5945 actually evaluated, and any side-effecting operations (such as
5946 assignments or function calls) inside it do not take place.
5947 @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.
5948
5949 @item whatis
5950 Print the data type of @code{$}, the last value in the value history.
5951
5952 @item ptype @var{typename}
5953 @kindex ptype
5954 Print a description of data type @var{typename}. @var{typename} may be
5955 the name of a type, or for C code it may have the form
5956 @samp{struct @var{struct-tag}}, @samp{union @var{union-tag}} or
5957 @samp{enum @var{enum-tag}}.
5958
5959 @item ptype @var{exp}
5960 @itemx ptype
5961 Print a description of the type of expression @var{exp}. @code{ptype}
5962 differs from @code{whatis} by printing a detailed description, instead
5963 of just the name of the type.
5964
5965 For example, for this variable declaration:
5966
5967 @example
5968 struct complex @{double real; double imag;@} v;
5969 @end example
5970
5971 @noindent
5972 the two commands give this output:
5973
5974 @example
5975 @group
5976 (@value{GDBP}) whatis v
5977 type = struct complex
5978 (@value{GDBP}) ptype v
5979 type = struct complex @{
5980 double real;
5981 double imag;
5982 @}
5983 @end group
5984 @end example
5985
5986 @noindent
5987 As with @code{whatis}, using @code{ptype} without an argument refers to
5988 the type of @code{$}, the last value in the value history.
5989
5990 @item info types @var{regexp}
5991 @itemx info types
5992 @kindex info types
5993 Print a brief description of all types whose name matches @var{regexp}
5994 (or all types in your program, if you supply no argument). Each
5995 complete typename is matched as though it were a complete line; thus,
5996 @samp{i type value} gives information on all types in your program whose
5997 name includes the string @code{value}, but @samp{i type ^value$} gives
5998 information only on types whose complete name is @code{value}.
5999
6000 This command differs from @code{ptype} in two ways: first, like
6001 @code{whatis}, it does not print a detailed description; second, it
6002 lists all source files where a type is defined.
6003
6004 @item info source
6005 @kindex info source
6006 Show the name of the current source file---that is, the source file for
6007 the function containing the current point of execution---and the language
6008 it was written in.
6009
6010 @item info sources
6011 @kindex info sources
6012 Print the names of all source files in your program for which there is
6013 debugging information, organized into two lists: files whose symbols
6014 have already been read, and files whose symbols will be read when needed.
6015
6016 @item info functions
6017 @kindex info functions
6018 Print the names and data types of all defined functions.
6019
6020 @item info functions @var{regexp}
6021 Print the names and data types of all defined functions
6022 whose names contain a match for regular expression @var{regexp}.
6023 Thus, @samp{info fun step} finds all functions whose names
6024 include @code{step}; @samp{info fun ^step} finds those whose names
6025 start with @code{step}.
6026
6027 @item info variables
6028 @kindex info variables
6029 Print the names and data types of all variables that are declared
6030 outside of functions (i.e., excluding local variables).
6031
6032 @item info variables @var{regexp}
6033 Print the names and data types of all variables (except for local
6034 variables) whose names contain a match for regular expression
6035 @var{regexp}.
6036
6037 @ignore
6038 This was never implemented.
6039 @item info methods
6040 @itemx info methods @var{regexp}
6041 @kindex info methods
6042 The @code{info methods} command permits the user to examine all defined
6043 methods within C++ program, or (with the @var{regexp} argument) a
6044 specific set of methods found in the various C++ classes. Many
6045 C++ classes provide a large number of methods. Thus, the output
6046 from the @code{ptype} command can be overwhelming and hard to use. The
6047 @code{info-methods} command filters the methods, printing only those
6048 which match the regular-expression @var{regexp}.
6049 @end ignore
6050
6051 @item maint print symbols @var{filename}
6052 @itemx maint print psymbols @var{filename}
6053 @itemx maint print msymbols @var{filename}
6054 @kindex maint print symbols
6055 @cindex symbol dump
6056 @kindex maint print psymbols
6057 @cindex partial symbol dump
6058 Write a dump of debugging symbol data into the file @var{filename}.
6059 These commands are used to debug the @value{GDBN} symbol-reading code. Only
6060 symbols with debugging data are included. If you use @samp{maint print
6061 symbols}, @value{GDBN} includes all the symbols for which it has already
6062 collected full details: that is, @var{filename} reflects symbols for
6063 only those files whose symbols @value{GDBN} has read. You can use the
6064 command @code{info sources} to find out which files these are. If you
6065 use @samp{maint print psymbols} instead, the dump shows information about
6066 symbols that @value{GDBN} only knows partially---that is, symbols defined in
6067 files that @value{GDBN} has skimmed, but not yet read completely. Finally,
6068 @samp{maint print msymbols} dumps just the minimal symbol information
6069 required for each object file from which @value{GDBN} has read some symbols.
6070 The description of @code{symbol-file} explains how @value{GDBN} reads
6071 symbols; both @code{info source} and @code{symbol-file} are described in
6072 @ref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}.
6073 @end table
6074
6075 @node Altering
6076 @chapter Altering Execution
6077
6078 Once you think you have found an error in your program, you might want to
6079 find out for certain whether correcting the apparent error would lead to
6080 correct results in the rest of the run. You can find the answer by
6081 experiment, using the @value{GDBN} features for altering execution of the
6082 program.
6083
6084 For example, you can store new values into variables or memory
6085 locations,
6086 @ifclear BARETARGET
6087 give your program a signal, restart it
6088 @end ifclear
6089 @ifset BARETARGET
6090 restart your program
6091 @end ifset
6092 at a different address, or even return prematurely from a function to
6093 its caller.
6094
6095 @menu
6096 * Assignment:: Assignment to variables
6097 * Jumping:: Continuing at a different address
6098 @ifclear BARETARGET
6099 * Signaling:: Giving your program a signal
6100 @end ifclear
6101
6102 * Returning:: Returning from a function
6103 * Calling:: Calling your program's functions
6104 * Patching:: Patching your program
6105 @end menu
6106
6107 @node Assignment
6108 @section Assignment to variables
6109
6110 @cindex assignment
6111 @cindex setting variables
6112 To alter the value of a variable, evaluate an assignment expression.
6113 @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}. For example,
6114
6115 @example
6116 print x=4
6117 @end example
6118
6119 @noindent
6120 stores the value 4 into the variable @code{x}, and then prints the
6121 value of the assignment expression (which is 4).
6122 @ifclear CONLY
6123 @xref{Languages, ,Using @value{GDBN} with Different Languages}, for more
6124 information on operators in supported languages.
6125 @end ifclear
6126
6127 @kindex set variable
6128 @cindex variables, setting
6129 If you are not interested in seeing the value of the assignment, use the
6130 @code{set} command instead of the @code{print} command. @code{set} is
6131 really the same as @code{print} except that the expression's value is
6132 not printed and is not put in the value history (@pxref{Value History,
6133 ,Value history}). The expression is evaluated only for its effects.
6134
6135 If the beginning of the argument string of the @code{set} command
6136 appears identical to a @code{set} subcommand, use the @code{set
6137 variable} command instead of just @code{set}. This command is identical
6138 to @code{set} except for its lack of subcommands. For example, if
6139 your program has a variable @code{width}, you get
6140 an error if you try to set a new value with just @samp{set width=13},
6141 because @value{GDBN} has the command @code{set width}:
6142
6143 @example
6144 (@value{GDBP}) whatis width
6145 type = double
6146 (@value{GDBP}) p width
6147 $4 = 13
6148 (@value{GDBP}) set width=47
6149 Invalid syntax in expression.
6150 @end example
6151
6152 @noindent
6153 The invalid expression, of course, is @samp{=47}. In
6154 order to actually set the program's variable @code{width}, use
6155
6156 @example
6157 (@value{GDBP}) set var width=47
6158 @end example
6159
6160 @value{GDBN} allows more implicit conversions in assignments than C; you can
6161 freely store an integer value into a pointer variable or vice versa,
6162 and you can convert any structure to any other structure that is the
6163 same length or shorter.
6164 @comment FIXME: how do structs align/pad in these conversions?
6165 @comment /pesch@cygnus.com 18dec1990
6166
6167 To store values into arbitrary places in memory, use the @samp{@{@dots{}@}}
6168 construct to generate a value of specified type at a specified address
6169 (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}). For example, @code{@{int@}0x83040} refers
6170 to memory location @code{0x83040} as an integer (which implies a certain size
6171 and representation in memory), and
6172
6173 @example
6174 set @{int@}0x83040 = 4
6175 @end example
6176
6177 @noindent
6178 stores the value 4 into that memory location.
6179
6180 @node Jumping
6181 @section Continuing at a different address
6182
6183 Ordinarily, when you continue your program, you do so at the place where
6184 it stopped, with the @code{continue} command. You can instead continue at
6185 an address of your own choosing, with the following commands:
6186
6187 @table @code
6188 @item jump @var{linespec}
6189 @kindex jump
6190 Resume execution at line @var{linespec}. Execution will stop
6191 immediately if there is a breakpoint there. @xref{List, ,Printing
6192 source lines}, for a description of the different forms of
6193 @var{linespec}.
6194
6195 The @code{jump} command does not change the current stack frame, or
6196 the stack pointer, or the contents of any memory location or any
6197 register other than the program counter. If line @var{linespec} is in
6198 a different function from the one currently executing, the results may
6199 be bizarre if the two functions expect different patterns of arguments or
6200 of local variables. For this reason, the @code{jump} command requests
6201 confirmation if the specified line is not in the function currently
6202 executing. However, even bizarre results are predictable if you are
6203 well acquainted with the machine-language code of your program.
6204
6205 @item jump *@var{address}
6206 Resume execution at the instruction at address @var{address}.
6207 @end table
6208
6209 You can get much the same effect as the @code{jump} command by storing a
6210 new value into the register @code{$pc}. The difference is that this
6211 does not start your program running; it only changes the address where it
6212 @emph{will} run when it is continued. For example,
6213
6214 @example
6215 set $pc = 0x485
6216 @end example
6217
6218 @noindent
6219 causes the next @code{continue} command or stepping command to execute at
6220 address @code{0x485}, rather than at the address where your program stopped.
6221 @xref{Continuing and Stepping, ,Continuing and stepping}.
6222
6223 The most common occasion to use the @code{jump} command is to back up,
6224 perhaps with more breakpoints set, over a portion of a program that has
6225 already executed, in order to examine its execution in more detail.
6226
6227 @ifclear BARETARGET
6228 @c @group
6229 @node Signaling
6230 @section Giving your program a signal
6231
6232 @table @code
6233 @item signal @var{signalnum}
6234 @kindex signal
6235 Resume execution where your program stopped, but give it immediately the
6236 signal number @var{signalnum}.
6237
6238 Alternatively, if @var{signalnum} is zero, continue execution without
6239 giving a signal. This is useful when your program stopped on account of
6240 a signal and would ordinary see the signal when resumed with the
6241 @code{continue} command; @samp{signal 0} causes it to resume without a
6242 signal.
6243
6244 @code{signal} does not repeat when you press @key{RET} a second time
6245 after executing the command.
6246 @end table
6247 @c @end group
6248 @end ifclear
6249
6250 @node Returning
6251 @section Returning from a function
6252
6253 @table @code
6254 @item return
6255 @itemx return @var{expression}
6256 @cindex returning from a function
6257 @kindex return
6258 You can cancel execution of a function call with the @code{return}
6259 command. If you give an
6260 @var{expression} argument, its value is used as the function's return
6261 value.
6262 @end table
6263
6264 When you use @code{return}, @value{GDBN} discards the selected stack frame
6265 (and all frames within it). You can think of this as making the
6266 discarded frame return prematurely. If you wish to specify a value to
6267 be returned, give that value as the argument to @code{return}.
6268
6269 This pops the selected stack frame (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a
6270 frame}), and any other frames inside of it, leaving its caller as the
6271 innermost remaining frame. That frame becomes selected. The
6272 specified value is stored in the registers used for returning values
6273 of functions.
6274
6275 The @code{return} command does not resume execution; it leaves the
6276 program stopped in the state that would exist if the function had just
6277 returned. In contrast, the @code{finish} command (@pxref{Continuing
6278 and Stepping, ,Continuing and stepping}) resumes execution until the
6279 selected stack frame returns naturally.
6280
6281 @node Calling
6282 @section Calling program functions
6283
6284 @cindex calling functions
6285 @kindex call
6286 @table @code
6287 @item call @var{expr}
6288 Evaluate the expression @var{expr} without displaying @code{void}
6289 returned values.
6290 @end table
6291
6292 You can use this variant of the @code{print} command if you want to
6293 execute a function from your program, but without cluttering the output
6294 with @code{void} returned values. The result is printed and saved in
6295 the value history, if it is not void.
6296
6297 @node Patching
6298 @section Patching programs
6299 @cindex patching binaries
6300 @cindex writing into executables
6301 @ifclear BARETARGET
6302 @cindex writing into corefiles
6303 @end ifclear
6304
6305 By default, @value{GDBN} opens the file containing your program's executable
6306 code
6307 @ifclear BARETARGET
6308 (or the corefile)
6309 @end ifclear
6310 read-only. This prevents accidental alterations
6311 to machine code; but it also prevents you from intentionally patching
6312 your program's binary.
6313
6314 If you'd like to be able to patch the binary, you can specify that
6315 explicitly with the @code{set write} command. For example, you might
6316 want to turn on internal debugging flags, or even to make emergency
6317 repairs.
6318
6319 @table @code
6320 @item set write on
6321 @itemx set write off
6322 @kindex set write
6323 If you specify @samp{set write on}, @value{GDBN} will open executable
6324 @ifclear BARETARGET
6325 and core
6326 @end ifclear
6327 files for both reading and writing; if you specify @samp{set write
6328 off} (the default), @value{GDBN} will open them read-only.
6329
6330 If you have already loaded a file, you must load it again (using the
6331 @code{exec-file}
6332 @ifclear BARETARGET
6333 or @code{core-file}
6334 @end ifclear
6335 command) after changing @code{set write}, for your new setting to take
6336 effect.
6337
6338 @item show write
6339 @kindex show write
6340 Display whether executable files
6341 @ifclear BARETARGET
6342 and core files
6343 @end ifclear
6344 will be opened for writing as well as reading.
6345 @end table
6346
6347 @node GDB Files
6348 @chapter @value{GDBN} Files
6349
6350 @value{GDBN} needs to know the file name of the program to be debugged, both in
6351 order to read its symbol table and in order to start your program.
6352 @ifclear BARETARGET
6353 To debug a core dump of a previous run, you must also tell @value{GDBN}
6354 the name of the core dump file.
6355 @end ifclear
6356
6357 @menu
6358 * Files:: Commands to specify files
6359 * Symbol Errors:: Errors reading symbol files
6360 @end menu
6361
6362 @node Files
6363 @section Commands to specify files
6364 @cindex symbol table
6365
6366 @ifclear BARETARGET
6367 @cindex core dump file
6368 The usual way to specify executable and core dump file names is with
6369 the command arguments given when you start @value{GDBN} (@pxref{Invocation,
6370 ,Getting In and Out of @value{GDBN}}.
6371 @end ifclear
6372 @ifset BARETARGET
6373 The usual way to specify an executable file name is with
6374 the command argument given when you start @value{GDBN}, (@pxref{Invocation,
6375 ,Getting In and Out of @value{GDBN}}.
6376 @end ifset
6377
6378 Occasionally it is necessary to change to a different file during a
6379 @value{GDBN} session. Or you may run @value{GDBN} and forget to specify
6380 a file you want to use. In these situations the @value{GDBN} commands
6381 to specify new files are useful.
6382
6383 @table @code
6384 @item file @var{filename}
6385 @cindex executable file
6386 @kindex file
6387 Use @var{filename} as the program to be debugged. It is read for its
6388 symbols and for the contents of pure memory. It is also the program
6389 executed when you use the @code{run} command. If you do not specify a
6390 directory and the file is not found in the @value{GDBN} working directory, @value{GDBN}
6391 uses the environment variable @code{PATH} as a list of directories to
6392 search, just as the shell does when looking for a program to run. You
6393 can change the value of this variable, for both @value{GDBN} and your program,
6394 using the @code{path} command.
6395
6396 On systems with memory-mapped files, an auxiliary symbol table file
6397 @file{@var{filename}.syms} may be available for @var{filename}. If it
6398 is, @value{GDBN} will map in the symbol table from
6399 @file{@var{filename}.syms}, starting up more quickly. See the
6400 descriptions of the options @samp{-mapped} and @samp{-readnow} (available
6401 on the command line, and with the commands @code{file}, @code{symbol-file},
6402 or @code{add-symbol-file}), for more information.
6403
6404 @item file
6405 @code{file} with no argument makes @value{GDBN} discard any information it
6406 has on both executable file and the symbol table.
6407
6408 @item exec-file @r{[} @var{filename} @r{]}
6409 @kindex exec-file
6410 Specify that the program to be run (but not the symbol table) is found
6411 in @var{filename}. @value{GDBN} will search the environment variable @code{PATH}
6412 if necessary to locate your program. Omitting @var{filename} means to
6413 discard information on the executable file.
6414
6415 @item symbol-file @r{[} @var{filename} @r{]}
6416 @kindex symbol-file
6417 Read symbol table information from file @var{filename}. @code{PATH} is
6418 searched when necessary. Use the @code{file} command to get both symbol
6419 table and program to run from the same file.
6420
6421 @code{symbol-file} with no argument clears out @value{GDBN} information on your
6422 program's symbol table.
6423
6424 The @code{symbol-file} command causes @value{GDBN} to forget the contents of its
6425 convenience variables, the value history, and all breakpoints and
6426 auto-display expressions. This is because they may contain pointers to
6427 the internal data recording symbols and data types, which are part of
6428 the old symbol table data being discarded inside @value{GDBN}.
6429
6430 @code{symbol-file} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after
6431 executing it once.
6432
6433 When @value{GDBN} is configured for a particular environment, it will
6434 understand debugging information in whatever format is the standard
6435 generated for that environment; you may use either a GNU compiler, or
6436 other compilers that adhere to the local conventions. Best results are
6437 usually obtained from GNU compilers; for example, using @code{@value{GCC}}
6438 you can generate debugging information for optimized code.
6439
6440 On some kinds of object files, the @code{symbol-file} command does not
6441 normally read the symbol table in full right away. Instead, it scans
6442 the symbol table quickly to find which source files and which symbols
6443 are present. The details are read later, one source file at a time,
6444 as they are needed.
6445
6446 The purpose of this two-stage reading strategy is to make @value{GDBN} start up
6447 faster. For the most part, it is invisible except for occasional
6448 pauses while the symbol table details for a particular source file are
6449 being read. (The @code{set verbose} command can turn these pauses
6450 into messages if desired. @xref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional warnings
6451 and messages}.)
6452
6453 We have not implemented the two-stage strategy for COFF yet. When the
6454 symbol table is stored in COFF format, @code{symbol-file} reads the
6455 symbol table data in full right away.
6456
6457 @item symbol-file @var{filename} @r{[} -readnow @r{]} @r{[} -mapped @r{]}
6458 @itemx file @var{filename} @r{[} -readnow @r{]} @r{[} -mapped @r{]}
6459 @kindex readnow
6460 @cindex reading symbols immediately
6461 @cindex symbols, reading immediately
6462 @kindex mapped
6463 @cindex memory-mapped symbol file
6464 @cindex saving symbol table
6465 You can override the @value{GDBN} two-stage strategy for reading symbol
6466 tables by using the @samp{-readnow} option with any of the commands that
6467 load symbol table information, if you want to be sure @value{GDBN} has the
6468 entire symbol table available.
6469
6470 @ifclear BARETARGET
6471 If memory-mapped files are available on your system through the
6472 @code{mmap} system call, you can use another option, @samp{-mapped}, to
6473 cause @value{GDBN} to write the symbols for your program into a reusable
6474 file. Future @value{GDBN} debugging sessions will map in symbol information
6475 from this auxiliary symbol file (if the program has not changed), rather
6476 than spending time reading the symbol table from the executable
6477 program. Using the @samp{-mapped} option has the same effect as
6478 starting @value{GDBN} with the @samp{-mapped} command-line option.
6479
6480 You can use both options together, to make sure the auxiliary symbol
6481 file has all the symbol information for your program.
6482
6483 The auxiliary symbol file for a program called @var{myprog} is called
6484 @samp{@var{myprog}.syms}. Once this file exists (so long as it is newer
6485 than the corresponding executable), @value{GDBN} will always attempt to use
6486 it when you debug @var{myprog}; no special options or commands are
6487 needed.
6488
6489 The @file{.syms} file is specific to the host machine where you run
6490 @value{GDBN}. It holds an exact image of the internal @value{GDBN}
6491 symbol table. It cannot be shared across multiple host platforms.
6492
6493 @c FIXME: for now no mention of directories, since this seems to be in
6494 @c flux. 13mar1992 status is that in theory GDB would look either in
6495 @c current dir or in same dir as myprog; but issues like competing
6496 @c GDB's, or clutter in system dirs, mean that in practice right now
6497 @c only current dir is used. FFish says maybe a special GDB hierarchy
6498 @c (eg rooted in val of env var GDBSYMS) could exist for mappable symbol
6499 @c files.
6500
6501 @item core-file @r{[} @var{filename} @r{]}
6502 @kindex core
6503 @kindex core-file
6504 Specify the whereabouts of a core dump file to be used as the ``contents
6505 of memory''. Traditionally, core files contain only some parts of the
6506 address space of the process that generated them; @value{GDBN} can access the
6507 executable file itself for other parts.
6508
6509 @code{core-file} with no argument specifies that no core file is
6510 to be used.
6511
6512 Note that the core file is ignored when your program is actually running
6513 under @value{GDBN}. So, if you have been running your program and you wish to
6514 debug a core file instead, you must kill the subprocess in which the
6515 program is running. To do this, use the @code{kill} command
6516 (@pxref{Kill Process, ,Killing the child process}).
6517 @end ifclear
6518
6519 @item load @var{filename}
6520 @kindex load
6521 @ifset GENERIC
6522 Depending on what remote debugging facilities are configured into
6523 @value{GDBN}, the @code{load} command may be available. Where it exists, it
6524 is meant to make @var{filename} (an executable) available for debugging
6525 on the remote system---by downloading, or dynamic linking, for example.
6526 @code{load} also records the @var{filename} symbol table in @value{GDBN}, like
6527 the @code{add-symbol-file} command.
6528
6529 If your @value{GDBN} does not have a @code{load} command, attempting to
6530 execute it gets the error message ``@code{You can't do that when your
6531 target is @dots{}}''
6532 @end ifset
6533
6534 @ifset VXWORKS
6535 On VxWorks, @code{load} will dynamically link @var{filename} on the
6536 current target system as well as adding its symbols in @value{GDBN}.
6537 @end ifset
6538
6539 @ifset I960
6540 @cindex download to Nindy-960
6541 With the Nindy interface to an Intel 960 board, @code{load} will
6542 download @var{filename} to the 960 as well as adding its symbols in
6543 @value{GDBN}.
6544 @end ifset
6545
6546 @ifset H8
6547 @cindex download to H8/300 or H8/500
6548 @cindex H8/300 or H8/500 download
6549 @c start-sanitize-Hitachi-SH
6550 @cindex download to Hitachi SH
6551 @cindex Hitachi SH download
6552 @c end-sanitize-Hitachi-SH
6553 When you select remote debugging to a Hitachi
6554 @c start-sanitize-Hitachi-SH
6555 SH,
6556 @c end-sanitize-Hitachi-SH
6557 H8/300, or H8/500 board
6558 (@pxref{Hitachi Remote,,@value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors}),
6559 the @code{load} command downloads your program to the Hitachi board and also
6560 opens it as the current executable target for @value{GDBN} on your host
6561 (like the @code{file} command).
6562 @end ifset
6563
6564 @code{load} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after using it.
6565
6566 @ifclear BARETARGET
6567 @item add-symbol-file @var{filename} @var{address}
6568 @itemx add-symbol-file @var{filename} @var{address} @r{[} -readnow @r{]} @r{[} -mapped @r{]}
6569 @kindex add-symbol-file
6570 @cindex dynamic linking
6571 The @code{add-symbol-file} command reads additional symbol table information
6572 from the file @var{filename}. You would use this command when @var{filename}
6573 has been dynamically loaded (by some other means) into the program that
6574 is running. @var{address} should be the memory address at which the
6575 file has been loaded; @value{GDBN} cannot figure this out for itself.
6576
6577 The symbol table of the file @var{filename} is added to the symbol table
6578 originally read with the @code{symbol-file} command. You can use the
6579 @code{add-symbol-file} command any number of times; the new symbol data thus
6580 read keeps adding to the old. To discard all old symbol data instead,
6581 use the @code{symbol-file} command.
6582
6583 @code{add-symbol-file} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} after using it.
6584
6585 You can use the @samp{-mapped} and @samp{-readnow} options just as with
6586 the @code{symbol-file} command, to change how @value{GDBN} manages the symbol
6587 table information for @var{filename}.
6588 @end ifclear
6589
6590 @item info files
6591 @itemx info target
6592 @kindex info files
6593 @kindex info target
6594 @code{info files} and @code{info target} are synonymous; both print
6595 the current target (@pxref{Targets, ,Specifying a Debugging Target}),
6596 including the
6597 @ifclear BARETARGET
6598 names of the executable and core dump files
6599 @end ifclear
6600 @ifset BARETARGET
6601 name of the executable file
6602 @end ifset
6603 currently in use by @value{GDBN}, and the files from which symbols were
6604 loaded. The command @code{help targets} lists all possible targets
6605 rather than current ones.
6606 @end table
6607
6608 All file-specifying commands allow both absolute and relative file names
6609 as arguments. @value{GDBN} always converts the file name to an absolute path
6610 name and remembers it that way.
6611
6612 @ifclear BARETARGET
6613 @cindex shared libraries
6614 @value{GDBN} supports SunOS, SVR4, and IBM RS/6000 shared libraries.
6615 @value{GDBN} automatically loads symbol definitions from shared libraries
6616 when you use the @code{run} command, or when you examine a core file.
6617 (Before you issue the @code{run} command, @value{GDBN} will not understand
6618 references to a function in a shared library, however---unless you are
6619 debugging a core file).
6620 @c FIXME: next @value{GDBN} release should permit some refs to undef
6621 @c FIXME...symbols---eg in a break cmd---assuming they are from a shared lib
6622
6623 @table @code
6624 @item info share
6625 @itemx info sharedlibrary
6626 @kindex info sharedlibrary
6627 @kindex info share
6628 Print the names of the shared libraries which are currently loaded.
6629
6630 @item sharedlibrary @var{regex}
6631 @itemx share @var{regex}
6632 @kindex sharedlibrary
6633 @kindex share
6634 This is an obsolescent command; you can use it to explicitly
6635 load shared object library symbols for files matching a UNIX regular
6636 expression, but as with files loaded automatically, it will only load
6637 shared libraries required by your program for a core file or after
6638 typing @code{run}. If @var{regex} is omitted all shared libraries
6639 required by your program are loaded.
6640 @end table
6641 @end ifclear
6642
6643 @node Symbol Errors
6644 @section Errors reading symbol files
6645
6646 While reading a symbol file, @value{GDBN} will occasionally encounter problems,
6647 such as symbol types it does not recognize, or known bugs in compiler
6648 output. By default, @value{GDBN} does not notify you of such problems, since
6649 they are relatively common and primarily of interest to people
6650 debugging compilers. If you are interested in seeing information
6651 about ill-constructed symbol tables, you can either ask @value{GDBN} to print
6652 only one message about each such type of problem, no matter how many
6653 times the problem occurs; or you can ask @value{GDBN} to print more messages,
6654 to see how many times the problems occur, with the @code{set
6655 complaints} command (@pxref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional warnings and
6656 messages}).
6657
6658 The messages currently printed, and their meanings, are:
6659
6660 @table @code
6661 @item inner block not inside outer block in @var{symbol}
6662
6663 The symbol information shows where symbol scopes begin and end
6664 (such as at the start of a function or a block of statements). This
6665 error indicates that an inner scope block is not fully contained
6666 in its outer scope blocks.
6667
6668 @value{GDBN} circumvents the problem by treating the inner block as if it had
6669 the same scope as the outer block. In the error message, @var{symbol}
6670 may be shown as ``@code{(don't know)}'' if the outer block is not a
6671 function.
6672
6673 @item block at @var{address} out of order
6674
6675 The symbol information for symbol scope blocks should occur in
6676 order of increasing addresses. This error indicates that it does not
6677 do so.
6678
6679 @value{GDBN} does not circumvent this problem, and will have trouble
6680 locating symbols in the source file whose symbols it is reading. (You
6681 can often determine what source file is affected by specifying
6682 @code{set verbose on}. @xref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional warnings and
6683 messages}.)
6684
6685 @item bad block start address patched
6686
6687 The symbol information for a symbol scope block has a start address
6688 smaller than the address of the preceding source line. This is known
6689 to occur in the SunOS 4.1.1 (and earlier) C compiler.
6690
6691 @value{GDBN} circumvents the problem by treating the symbol scope block as
6692 starting on the previous source line.
6693
6694 @item bad string table offset in symbol @var{n}
6695
6696 @cindex foo
6697 Symbol number @var{n} contains a pointer into the string table which is
6698 larger than the size of the string table.
6699
6700 @value{GDBN} circumvents the problem by considering the symbol to have the
6701 name @code{foo}, which may cause other problems if many symbols end up
6702 with this name.
6703
6704 @item unknown symbol type @code{0x@var{nn}}
6705
6706 The symbol information contains new data types that @value{GDBN} does not yet
6707 know how to read. @code{0x@var{nn}} is the symbol type of the misunderstood
6708 information, in hexadecimal.
6709
6710 @value{GDBN} circumvents the error by ignoring this symbol information. This
6711 will usually allow your program to be debugged, though certain symbols
6712 will not be accessible. If you encounter such a problem and feel like
6713 debugging it, you can debug @code{@value{GDBP}} with itself, breakpoint on
6714 @code{complain}, then go up to the function @code{read_dbx_symtab} and
6715 examine @code{*bufp} to see the symbol.
6716
6717 @item stub type has NULL name
6718 @value{GDBN} could not find the full definition for
6719 @ifclear CONLY
6720 a struct or class.
6721 @end ifclear
6722 @ifset CONLY
6723 a struct.
6724 @end ifset
6725
6726 @ifclear CONLY
6727 @item const/volatile indicator missing (ok if using g++ v1.x), got@dots{}
6728
6729 The symbol information for a C++ member function is missing some
6730 information that recent versions of the compiler should have output
6731 for it.
6732 @end ifclear
6733
6734 @item info mismatch between compiler and debugger
6735
6736 @value{GDBN} could not parse a type specification output by the compiler.
6737 @end table
6738
6739 @node Targets
6740 @chapter Specifying a Debugging Target
6741 @cindex debugging target
6742 @kindex target
6743
6744 A @dfn{target} is the execution environment occupied by your program.
6745 @ifclear BARETARGET
6746 Often, @value{GDBN} runs in the same host environment as your program; in
6747 that case, the debugging target is specified as a side effect when you
6748 use the @code{file} or @code{core} commands. When you need more
6749 flexibility---for example, running @value{GDBN} on a physically separate
6750 host, or controlling a standalone system over a serial port or a
6751 realtime system over a TCP/IP connection---you
6752 @end ifclear
6753 @ifset BARETARGET
6754 You
6755 @end ifset
6756 can use the @code{target} command to specify one of the target types
6757 configured for @value{GDBN} (@pxref{Target Commands, ,Commands for managing
6758 targets}).
6759
6760 @menu
6761 * Active Targets:: Active targets
6762 * Target Commands:: Commands for managing targets
6763 * Remote:: Remote debugging
6764 @end menu
6765
6766 @node Active Targets
6767 @section Active targets
6768 @cindex stacking targets
6769 @cindex active targets
6770 @cindex multiple targets
6771
6772 @ifclear BARETARGET
6773 There are three classes of targets: processes, core files, and
6774 executable files. @value{GDBN} can work concurrently on up to three active
6775 targets, one in each class. This allows you to (for example) start a
6776 process and inspect its activity without abandoning your work on a core
6777 file.
6778
6779 For example, if you execute @samp{gdb a.out}, then the executable file
6780 @code{a.out} is the only active target. If you designate a core file as
6781 well---presumably from a prior run that crashed and coredumped---then
6782 @value{GDBN} has two active targets and will use them in tandem, looking
6783 first in the corefile target, then in the executable file, to satisfy
6784 requests for memory addresses. (Typically, these two classes of target
6785 are complementary, since core files contain only a program's
6786 read-write memory---variables and so on---plus machine status, while
6787 executable files contain only the program text and initialized data.)
6788 @end ifclear
6789
6790 When you type @code{run}, your executable file becomes an active process
6791 target as well. When a process target is active, all @value{GDBN} commands
6792 requesting memory addresses refer to that target; addresses in an
6793 @ifclear BARETARGET
6794 active core file or
6795 @end ifclear
6796 executable file target are obscured while the process
6797 target is active.
6798
6799 @ifset BARETARGET
6800 Use the @code{exec-file} command to select a
6801 new executable target (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify
6802 files}).
6803 @end ifset
6804 @ifclear BARETARGET
6805 Use the @code{core-file} and @code{exec-file} commands to select a
6806 new core file or executable target (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify
6807 files}). To specify as a target a process that is already running, use
6808 the @code{attach} command (@pxref{Attach, ,Debugging an
6809 already-running process}).
6810 @end ifclear
6811
6812 @node Target Commands
6813 @section Commands for managing targets
6814
6815 @table @code
6816 @item target @var{type} @var{parameters}
6817 Connects the @value{GDBN} host environment to a target
6818 @ifset BARETARGET
6819 machine.
6820 @end ifset
6821 @ifclear BARETARGET
6822 machine or process. A target is typically a protocol for talking to
6823 debugging facilities. You use the argument @var{type} to specify the
6824 type or protocol of the target machine.
6825
6826 Further @var{parameters} are interpreted by the target protocol, but
6827 typically include things like device names or host names to connect
6828 with, process numbers, and baud rates.
6829 @end ifclear
6830
6831 The @code{target} command will not repeat if you press @key{RET} again
6832 after executing the command.
6833
6834 @item help target
6835 @kindex help target
6836 Displays the names of all targets available. To display targets
6837 currently selected, use either @code{info target} or @code{info files}
6838 (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}).
6839
6840 @item help target @var{name}
6841 Describe a particular target, including any parameters necessary to
6842 select it.
6843 @end table
6844
6845 Here are some common targets (available, or not, depending on the GDB
6846 configuration):
6847
6848 @table @code
6849 @item target exec @var{program}
6850 @kindex target exec
6851 An executable file. @samp{target exec @var{program}} is the same as
6852 @samp{exec-file @var{program}}.
6853
6854 @ifclear BARETARGET
6855 @item target core @var{filename}
6856 @kindex target core
6857 A core dump file. @samp{target core @var{filename}} is the same as
6858 @samp{core-file @var{filename}}.
6859 @end ifclear
6860
6861 @ifset REMOTESTUB
6862 @item target remote @var{dev}
6863 @kindex target remote
6864 Remote serial target in GDB-specific protocol. The argument @var{dev}
6865 specifies what serial device to use for the connection (e.g.
6866 @file{/dev/ttya}). @xref{Remote, ,Remote debugging}.
6867 @end ifset
6868
6869 @ifset SIMS
6870 @item target sim
6871 @kindex target sim
6872 CPU simulator. @xref{Simulator,,Simulated CPU Target}.
6873 @end ifset
6874
6875 @ifset AMD29K
6876 @item target udi @var{keyword}
6877 @kindex target udi
6878 Remote AMD29K target, using the AMD UDI protocol. The @var{keyword}
6879 argument specifies which 29K board or simulator to use. @xref{UDI29K
6880 Remote,,@value{GDBN} and the UDI protocol for AMD29K}.
6881
6882 @item target amd-eb @var{dev} @var{speed} @var{PROG}
6883 @kindex target amd-eb
6884 @cindex AMD EB29K
6885 Remote PC-resident AMD EB29K board, attached over serial lines.
6886 @var{dev} is the serial device, as for @code{target remote};
6887 @var{speed} allows you to specify the linespeed; and @var{PROG} is the
6888 name of the program to be debugged, as it appears to DOS on the PC.
6889 @xref{EB29K Remote, ,@value{GDBN} with a remote EB29K}.
6890
6891 @end ifset
6892 @ifset H8
6893 @item target hms
6894 @kindex target hms
6895 A Hitachi
6896 @c start-sanitize-Hitachi-SH
6897 SH,
6898 @c end-sanitize-Hitachi-SH
6899 H8/300, or H8/500 board, attached via serial line to your host.
6900 @ifclear H8EXCLUSIVE
6901 @c Unix only, not currently of interest for H8-only manual
6902 Use special commands @code{device} and @code{speed} to control the serial
6903 line and the communications speed used.
6904 @end ifclear
6905 @xref{Hitachi Remote,,@value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors}.
6906
6907 @end ifset
6908 @ifset I960
6909 @item target nindy @var{devicename}
6910 @kindex target nindy
6911 An Intel 960 board controlled by a Nindy Monitor. @var{devicename} is
6912 the name of the serial device to use for the connection, e.g.
6913 @file{/dev/ttya}. @xref{i960-Nindy Remote, ,@value{GDBN} with a remote i960 (Nindy)}.
6914
6915 @end ifset
6916 @ifset ST2000
6917 @item target st2000 @var{dev} @var{speed}
6918 @kindex target st2000
6919 A Tandem ST2000 phone switch, running Tandem's STDBUG protocol. @var{dev}
6920 is the name of the device attached to the ST2000 serial line;
6921 @var{speed} is the communication line speed. The arguments are not used
6922 if @value{GDBN} is configured to connect to the ST2000 using TCP or Telnet.
6923 @xref{ST2000 Remote,,@value{GDBN} with a Tandem ST2000}.
6924
6925 @end ifset
6926 @ifset VXWORKS
6927 @item target vxworks @var{machinename}
6928 @kindex target vxworks
6929 A VxWorks system, attached via TCP/IP. The argument @var{machinename}
6930 is the target system's machine name or IP address.
6931 @xref{VxWorks Remote, ,@value{GDBN} and VxWorks}.
6932 @end ifset
6933 @end table
6934
6935 @ifset GENERIC
6936 Different targets are available on different configurations of @value{GDBN}; your
6937 configuration may have more or fewer targets.
6938 @end ifset
6939
6940 @node Remote
6941 @section Remote debugging
6942 @cindex remote debugging
6943
6944 If you are trying to debug a program running on a machine that cannot run
6945 GDB in the usual way, it is often useful to use remote debugging. For
6946 example, you might use remote debugging on an operating system kernel, or on
6947 a small system which does not have a general purpose operating system
6948 powerful enough to run a full-featured debugger.
6949
6950 Some configurations of GDB have special serial or TCP/IP interfaces
6951 to make this work with particular debugging targets. In addition,
6952 GDB comes with a generic serial protocol (specific to GDB, but
6953 not specific to any particular target system) which you can use if you
6954 write the remote stubs---the code that will run on the remote system to
6955 communicate with GDB.
6956
6957 Other remote targets may be available in your
6958 configuration of GDB; use @code{help targets} to list them.
6959
6960 @ifset GENERIC
6961 @c Text on starting up GDB in various specific cases; it goes up front
6962 @c in manuals configured for any of those particular situations, here
6963 @c otherwise.
6964 @menu
6965 @ifset REMOTESTUB
6966 * Remote Serial:: @value{GDBN} remote serial protocol
6967 @end ifset
6968 @ifset I960
6969 * i960-Nindy Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a remote i960 (Nindy)
6970 @end ifset
6971 @ifset AMD29K
6972 * UDI29K Remote:: @value{GDBN} and the UDI protocol for AMD29K
6973 * EB29K Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a remote EB29K
6974 @end ifset
6975 @ifset VXWORKS
6976 * VxWorks Remote:: @value{GDBN} and VxWorks
6977 @end ifset
6978 @ifset ST2000
6979 * ST2000 Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a Tandem ST2000
6980 @end ifset
6981 @ifset H8
6982 * Hitachi Remote:: @value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors
6983 @end ifset
6984 @ifset MIPS
6985 * MIPS Remote:: @value{GDBN} and MIPS boards
6986 @end ifset
6987 @ifset SIMS
6988 * Simulator:: Simulated CPU target
6989 @end ifset
6990 @end menu
6991
6992 @include gdbinv-s.texi
6993 @end ifset
6994
6995 @node Controlling GDB
6996 @chapter Controlling @value{GDBN}
6997
6998 You can alter the way @value{GDBN} interacts with you by using
6999 the @code{set} command. For commands controlling how @value{GDBN} displays
7000 data, @pxref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}; other settings are described here.
7001
7002 @menu
7003 * Prompt:: Prompt
7004 * Editing:: Command editing
7005 * History:: Command history
7006 * Screen Size:: Screen size
7007 * Numbers:: Numbers
7008 * Messages/Warnings:: Optional warnings and messages
7009 @end menu
7010
7011 @node Prompt
7012 @section Prompt
7013 @cindex prompt
7014
7015 @value{GDBN} indicates its readiness to read a command by printing a string
7016 called the @dfn{prompt}. This string is normally @samp{(@value{GDBP})}. You
7017 can change the prompt string with the @code{set prompt} command. For
7018 instance, when debugging @value{GDBN} with @value{GDBN}, it is useful to change
7019 the prompt in one of the @value{GDBN} sessions so that you can always tell which
7020 one you are talking to.
7021
7022 @table @code
7023 @item set prompt @var{newprompt}
7024 @kindex set prompt
7025 Directs @value{GDBN} to use @var{newprompt} as its prompt string henceforth.
7026 @kindex show prompt
7027 @item show prompt
7028 Prints a line of the form: @samp{Gdb's prompt is: @var{your-prompt}}
7029 @end table
7030
7031 @node Editing
7032 @section Command editing
7033 @cindex readline
7034 @cindex command line editing
7035
7036 @value{GDBN} reads its input commands via the @dfn{readline} interface. This
7037 GNU library provides consistent behavior for programs which provide a
7038 command line interface to the user. Advantages are @code{emacs}-style
7039 or @code{vi}-style inline editing of commands, @code{csh}-like history
7040 substitution, and a storage and recall of command history across
7041 debugging sessions.
7042
7043 You may control the behavior of command line editing in @value{GDBN} with the
7044 command @code{set}.
7045
7046 @table @code
7047 @kindex set editing
7048 @cindex editing
7049 @item set editing
7050 @itemx set editing on
7051 Enable command line editing (enabled by default).
7052
7053 @item set editing off
7054 Disable command line editing.
7055
7056 @kindex show editing
7057 @item show editing
7058 Show whether command line editing is enabled.
7059 @end table
7060
7061 @node History
7062 @section Command history
7063
7064 @value{GDBN} can keep track of the commands you type during your
7065 debugging sessions, so that you can be certain of precisely what
7066 happened. Use these commands to manage the @value{GDBN} command
7067 history facility.
7068
7069 @table @code
7070 @cindex history substitution
7071 @cindex history file
7072 @kindex set history filename
7073 @item set history filename @var{fname}
7074 Set the name of the @value{GDBN} command history file to @var{fname}. This is
7075 the file from which @value{GDBN} will read an initial command history
7076 list or to which it will write this list when it exits. This list is
7077 accessed through history expansion or through the history
7078 command editing characters listed below. This file defaults to the
7079 value of the environment variable @code{GDBHISTFILE}, or to
7080 @file{./.gdb_history} if this variable is not set.
7081
7082 @cindex history save
7083 @kindex set history save
7084 @item set history save
7085 @itemx set history save on
7086 Record command history in a file, whose name may be specified with the
7087 @code{set history filename} command. By default, this option is disabled.
7088
7089 @item set history save off
7090 Stop recording command history in a file.
7091
7092 @cindex history size
7093 @kindex set history size
7094 @item set history size @var{size}
7095 Set the number of commands which @value{GDBN} will keep in its history list.
7096 This defaults to the value of the environment variable
7097 @code{HISTSIZE}, or to 256 if this variable is not set.
7098 @end table
7099
7100 @cindex history expansion
7101 History expansion assigns special meaning to the character @kbd{!}.
7102 @ifset have-readline-appendices
7103 @xref{Event Designators}.
7104 @end ifset
7105
7106 Since @kbd{!} is also the logical not operator in C, history expansion
7107 is off by default. If you decide to enable history expansion with the
7108 @code{set history expansion on} command, you may sometimes need to
7109 follow @kbd{!} (when it is used as logical not, in an expression) with
7110 a space or a tab to prevent it from being expanded. The readline
7111 history facilities will not attempt substitution on the strings
7112 @kbd{!=} and @kbd{!(}, even when history expansion is enabled.
7113
7114 The commands to control history expansion are:
7115
7116 @table @code
7117
7118 @kindex set history expansion
7119 @item set history expansion on
7120 @itemx set history expansion
7121 Enable history expansion. History expansion is off by default.
7122
7123 @item set history expansion off
7124 Disable history expansion.
7125
7126 The readline code comes with more complete documentation of
7127 editing and history expansion features. Users unfamiliar with @code{emacs}
7128 or @code{vi} may wish to read it.
7129 @ifset have-readline-appendices
7130 @xref{Command Line Editing}.
7131 @end ifset
7132
7133 @c @group
7134 @kindex show history
7135 @item show history
7136 @itemx show history filename
7137 @itemx show history save
7138 @itemx show history size
7139 @itemx show history expansion
7140 These commands display the state of the @value{GDBN} history parameters.
7141 @code{show history} by itself displays all four states.
7142 @c @end group
7143 @end table
7144
7145 @table @code
7146 @kindex show commands
7147 @item show commands
7148 Display the last ten commands in the command history.
7149
7150 @item show commands @var{n}
7151 Print ten commands centered on command number @var{n}.
7152
7153 @item show commands +
7154 Print ten commands just after the commands last printed.
7155 @end table
7156
7157 @node Screen Size
7158 @section Screen size
7159 @cindex size of screen
7160 @cindex pauses in output
7161
7162 Certain commands to @value{GDBN} may produce large amounts of
7163 information output to the screen. To help you read all of it,
7164 @value{GDBN} pauses and asks you for input at the end of each page of
7165 output. Type @key{RET} when you want to continue the output, or @kbd{q}
7166 to discard the remaining output. Also, the screen width setting
7167 determines when to wrap lines of output. Depending on what is being
7168 printed, @value{GDBN} tries to break the line at a readable place,
7169 rather than simply letting it overflow onto the following line.
7170
7171 Normally @value{GDBN} knows the size of the screen from the termcap data base
7172 together with the value of the @code{TERM} environment variable and the
7173 @code{stty rows} and @code{stty cols} settings. If this is not correct,
7174 you can override it with the @code{set height} and @code{set
7175 width} commands:
7176
7177 @table @code
7178 @item set height @var{lpp}
7179 @itemx show height
7180 @itemx set width @var{cpl}
7181 @itemx show width
7182 @kindex set height
7183 @kindex set width
7184 @kindex show width
7185 @kindex show height
7186 These @code{set} commands specify a screen height of @var{lpp} lines and
7187 a screen width of @var{cpl} characters. The associated @code{show}
7188 commands display the current settings.
7189
7190 If you specify a height of zero lines, @value{GDBN} will not pause during output
7191 no matter how long the output is. This is useful if output is to a file
7192 or to an editor buffer.
7193 @end table
7194
7195 @node Numbers
7196 @section Numbers
7197 @cindex number representation
7198 @cindex entering numbers
7199
7200 You can always enter numbers in octal, decimal, or hexadecimal in @value{GDBN} by
7201 the usual conventions: octal numbers begin with @samp{0}, decimal
7202 numbers end with @samp{.}, and hexadecimal numbers begin with @samp{0x}.
7203 Numbers that begin with none of these are, by default, entered in base
7204 10; likewise, the default display for numbers---when no particular
7205 format is specified---is base 10. You can change the default base for
7206 both input and output with the @code{set radix} command.
7207
7208 @table @code
7209 @kindex set radix
7210 @item set radix @var{base}
7211 Set the default base for numeric input and display. Supported choices
7212 for @var{base} are decimal 2, 8, 10, 16. @var{base} must itself be
7213 specified either unambiguously or using the current default radix; for
7214 example, any of
7215
7216 @example
7217 set radix 1010
7218 set radix 012
7219 set radix 10.
7220 set radix 0xa
7221 @end example
7222
7223 @noindent
7224 will set the base to decimal. On the other hand, @samp{set radix 10}
7225 will leave the radix unchanged no matter what it was.
7226
7227 @kindex show radix
7228 @item show radix
7229 Display the current default base for numeric input and display.
7230 @end table
7231
7232 @node Messages/Warnings
7233 @section Optional warnings and messages
7234
7235 By default, @value{GDBN} is silent about its inner workings. If you are running
7236 on a slow machine, you may want to use the @code{set verbose} command.
7237 It will make @value{GDBN} tell you when it does a lengthy internal operation, so
7238 you will not think it has crashed.
7239
7240 Currently, the messages controlled by @code{set verbose} are those
7241 which announce that the symbol table for a source file is being read;
7242 see @code{symbol-file} in @ref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}.
7243
7244 @table @code
7245 @kindex set verbose
7246 @item set verbose on
7247 Enables @value{GDBN} output of certain informational messages.
7248
7249 @item set verbose off
7250 Disables @value{GDBN} output of certain informational messages.
7251
7252 @kindex show verbose
7253 @item show verbose
7254 Displays whether @code{set verbose} is on or off.
7255 @end table
7256
7257 By default, if @value{GDBN} encounters bugs in the symbol table of an object
7258 file, it is silent; but if you are debugging a compiler, you may find
7259 this information useful (@pxref{Symbol Errors, ,Errors reading symbol files}).
7260
7261 @table @code
7262 @kindex set complaints
7263 @item set complaints @var{limit}
7264 Permits @value{GDBN} to output @var{limit} complaints about each type of unusual
7265 symbols before becoming silent about the problem. Set @var{limit} to
7266 zero to suppress all complaints; set it to a large number to prevent
7267 complaints from being suppressed.
7268
7269 @kindex show complaints
7270 @item show complaints
7271 Displays how many symbol complaints @value{GDBN} is permitted to produce.
7272 @end table
7273
7274 By default, @value{GDBN} is cautious, and asks what sometimes seems to be a
7275 lot of stupid questions to confirm certain commands. For example, if
7276 you try to run a program which is already running:
7277
7278 @example
7279 (@value{GDBP}) run
7280 The program being debugged has been started already.
7281 Start it from the beginning? (y or n)
7282 @end example
7283
7284 If you are willing to unflinchingly face the consequences of your own
7285 commands, you can disable this ``feature'':
7286
7287 @table @code
7288 @kindex set confirm
7289 @cindex flinching
7290 @cindex confirmation
7291 @cindex stupid questions
7292 @item set confirm off
7293 Disables confirmation requests.
7294
7295 @item set confirm on
7296 Enables confirmation requests (the default).
7297
7298 @item show confirm
7299 @kindex show confirm
7300 Displays state of confirmation requests.
7301 @end table
7302
7303 @c FIXME this does not really belong here. But where *does* it belong?
7304 @cindex reloading symbols
7305 Some systems allow individual object files that make up your program to
7306 be replaced without stopping and restarting your program.
7307 @ifset VXWORKS
7308 For example, in VxWorks you can simply recompile a defective object file
7309 and keep on running.
7310 @end ifset
7311 If you are running on one of these systems, you can allow @value{GDBN} to
7312 reload the symbols for automatically relinked modules:
7313
7314 @table @code
7315 @kindex set symbol-reloading
7316 @item set symbol-reloading on
7317 Replace symbol definitions for the corresponding source file when an
7318 object file with a particular name is seen again.
7319
7320 @item set symbol-reloading off
7321 Do not replace symbol definitions when re-encountering object files of
7322 the same name. This is the default state; if you are not running on a
7323 system that permits automatically relinking modules, you should leave
7324 @code{symbol-reloading} off, since otherwise @value{GDBN} may discard symbols
7325 when linking large programs, that may contain several modules (from
7326 different directories or libraries) with the same name.
7327
7328 @item show symbol-reloading
7329 Show the current @code{on} or @code{off} setting.
7330 @end table
7331
7332 @node Sequences
7333 @chapter Canned Sequences of Commands
7334
7335 Aside from breakpoint commands (@pxref{Break Commands, ,Breakpoint
7336 command lists}), @value{GDBN} provides two ways to store sequences of commands
7337 for execution as a unit: user-defined commands and command files.
7338
7339 @menu
7340 * Define:: User-defined commands
7341 * Hooks:: User-defined command hooks
7342 * Command Files:: Command files
7343 * Output:: Commands for controlled output
7344 @end menu
7345
7346 @node Define
7347 @section User-defined commands
7348
7349 @cindex user-defined command
7350 A @dfn{user-defined command} is a sequence of @value{GDBN} commands to which you
7351 assign a new name as a command. This is done with the @code{define}
7352 command.
7353
7354 @table @code
7355 @item define @var{commandname}
7356 @kindex define
7357 Define a command named @var{commandname}. If there is already a command
7358 by that name, you are asked to confirm that you want to redefine it.
7359
7360 The definition of the command is made up of other @value{GDBN} command lines,
7361 which are given following the @code{define} command. The end of these
7362 commands is marked by a line containing @code{end}.
7363
7364 @item document @var{commandname}
7365 @kindex document
7366 Give documentation to the user-defined command @var{commandname}. The
7367 command @var{commandname} must already be defined. This command reads
7368 lines of documentation just as @code{define} reads the lines of the
7369 command definition, ending with @code{end}. After the @code{document}
7370 command is finished, @code{help} on command @var{commandname} will print
7371 the documentation you have specified.
7372
7373 You may use the @code{document} command again to change the
7374 documentation of a command. Redefining the command with @code{define}
7375 does not change the documentation.
7376
7377 @item help user-defined
7378 @kindex help user-defined
7379 List all user-defined commands, with the first line of the documentation
7380 (if any) for each.
7381
7382 @item show user
7383 @itemx show user @var{commandname}
7384 @kindex show user
7385 Display the @value{GDBN} commands used to define @var{commandname} (but not its
7386 documentation). If no @var{commandname} is given, display the
7387 definitions for all user-defined commands.
7388 @end table
7389
7390 User-defined commands do not take arguments. When they are executed, the
7391 commands of the definition are not printed. An error in any command
7392 stops execution of the user-defined command.
7393
7394 Commands that would ask for confirmation if used interactively proceed
7395 without asking when used inside a user-defined command. Many @value{GDBN} commands
7396 that normally print messages to say what they are doing omit the messages
7397 when used in a user-defined command.
7398
7399 @node Hooks
7400 @section User-defined command hooks
7401 @cindex command files
7402
7403 You may define @emph{hooks}, which are a special kind of user-defined
7404 command. Whenever you run the command @samp{foo}, if the user-defined
7405 command @samp{hook-foo} exists, it is executed (with no arguments)
7406 before that command.
7407
7408 In addition, a pseudo-command, @samp{stop} exists. Defining
7409 (@samp{hook-stop}) makes the associated commands execute every time
7410 execution stops in your program: before breakpoint commands are run,
7411 displays are printed, or the stack frame is printed.
7412
7413 @ifclear BARETARGET
7414 For example, to ignore @code{SIGALRM} signals while
7415 single-stepping, but treat them normally during normal execution,
7416 you could define:
7417
7418 @example
7419 define hook-stop
7420 handle SIGALRM nopass
7421 end
7422
7423 define hook-run
7424 handle SIGALRM pass
7425 end
7426
7427 define hook-continue
7428 handle SIGLARM pass
7429 end
7430 @end example
7431 @end ifclear
7432
7433 You can define a hook for any single-word command in @value{GDBN}, but
7434 not for command aliases; you should define a hook for the basic command
7435 name, e.g. @code{backtrace} rather than @code{bt}.
7436 @c FIXME! So how does Joe User discover whether a command is an alias
7437 @c or not?
7438 If an error occurs during the execution of your hook, execution of
7439 @value{GDBN} commands stops and @value{GDBN} issues a prompt
7440 (before the command that you actually typed had a chance to run).
7441
7442 If you try to define a hook which does not match any known command, you
7443 will get a warning from the @code{define} command.
7444
7445 @node Command Files
7446 @section Command files
7447
7448 @cindex command files
7449 A command file for @value{GDBN} is a file of lines that are @value{GDBN} commands. Comments
7450 (lines starting with @kbd{#}) may also be included. An empty line in a
7451 command file does nothing; it does not mean to repeat the last command, as
7452 it would from the terminal.
7453
7454 @cindex init file
7455 @cindex @file{@value{GDBINIT}}
7456 When you start @value{GDBN}, it automatically executes commands from its
7457 @dfn{init files}. These are files named @file{@value{GDBINIT}}. @value{GDBN} reads
7458 the init file (if any) in your home directory and then the init file
7459 (if any) in the current working directory. (The init files are not
7460 executed if you use the @samp{-nx} option; @pxref{Mode Options,
7461 ,Choosing modes}.)
7462
7463 @ifset GENERIC
7464 @cindex init file name
7465 On some configurations of @value{GDBN}, the init file is known by a
7466 different name (these are typically environments where a specialized
7467 form of GDB may need to coexist with other forms, hence a different name
7468 for the specialized version's init file). These are the environments
7469 with special init file names:
7470
7471 @itemize @bullet
7472 @kindex .vxgdbinit
7473 @item
7474 VxWorks (Wind River Systems real-time OS): @samp{.vxgdbinit}
7475
7476 @kindex .os68gdbinit
7477 @item
7478 OS68K (Enea Data Systems real-time OS): @samp{.os68gdbinit}
7479
7480 @kindex .esgdbinit
7481 @item
7482 ES-1800 (Ericsson Telecom AB M68000 emulator): @samp{.esgdbinit}
7483 @end itemize
7484 @end ifset
7485
7486 You can also request the execution of a command file with the
7487 @code{source} command:
7488
7489 @table @code
7490 @item source @var{filename}
7491 @kindex source
7492 Execute the command file @var{filename}.
7493 @end table
7494
7495 The lines in a command file are executed sequentially. They are not
7496 printed as they are executed. An error in any command terminates execution
7497 of the command file.
7498
7499 Commands that would ask for confirmation if used interactively proceed
7500 without asking when used in a command file. Many @value{GDBN} commands that
7501 normally print messages to say what they are doing omit the messages
7502 when called from command files.
7503
7504 @node Output
7505 @section Commands for controlled output
7506
7507 During the execution of a command file or a user-defined command, normal
7508 @value{GDBN} output is suppressed; the only output that appears is what is
7509 explicitly printed by the commands in the definition. This section
7510 describes three commands useful for generating exactly the output you
7511 want.
7512
7513 @table @code
7514 @item echo @var{text}
7515 @kindex echo
7516 @c I do not consider backslash-space a standard C escape sequence
7517 @c because it is not in ANSI.
7518 Print @var{text}. Nonprinting characters can be included in
7519 @var{text} using C escape sequences, such as @samp{\n} to print a
7520 newline. @strong{No newline will be printed unless you specify one.}
7521 In addition to the standard C escape sequences, a backslash followed
7522 by a space stands for a space. This is useful for displaying a
7523 string with spaces at the beginning or the end, since leading and
7524 trailing spaces are otherwise trimmed from all arguments.
7525 To print @samp{@w{ }and foo =@w{ }}, use the command
7526 @samp{echo \@w{ }and foo = \@w{ }}.
7527
7528 A backslash at the end of @var{text} can be used, as in C, to continue
7529 the command onto subsequent lines. For example,
7530
7531 @example
7532 echo This is some text\n\
7533 which is continued\n\
7534 onto several lines.\n
7535 @end example
7536
7537 produces the same output as
7538
7539 @example
7540 echo This is some text\n
7541 echo which is continued\n
7542 echo onto several lines.\n
7543 @end example
7544
7545 @item output @var{expression}
7546 @kindex output
7547 Print the value of @var{expression} and nothing but that value: no
7548 newlines, no @samp{$@var{nn} = }. The value is not entered in the
7549 value history either. @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}, for more information on
7550 expressions.
7551
7552 @item output/@var{fmt} @var{expression}
7553 Print the value of @var{expression} in format @var{fmt}. You can use
7554 the same formats as for @code{print}. @xref{Output Formats,,Output
7555 formats}, for more information.
7556
7557 @item printf @var{string}, @var{expressions}@dots{}
7558 @kindex printf
7559 Print the values of the @var{expressions} under the control of
7560 @var{string}. The @var{expressions} are separated by commas and may
7561 be either numbers or pointers. Their values are printed as specified
7562 by @var{string}, exactly as if your program were to execute
7563
7564 @example
7565 printf (@var{string}, @var{expressions}@dots{});
7566 @end example
7567
7568 For example, you can print two values in hex like this:
7569
7570 @smallexample
7571 printf "foo, bar-foo = 0x%x, 0x%x\n", foo, bar-foo
7572 @end smallexample
7573
7574 The only backslash-escape sequences that you can use in the format
7575 string are the simple ones that consist of backslash followed by a
7576 letter.
7577 @end table
7578
7579 @ifclear DOSHOST
7580 @node Emacs
7581 @chapter Using @value{GDBN} under GNU Emacs
7582
7583 @cindex emacs
7584 A special interface allows you to use GNU Emacs to view (and
7585 edit) the source files for the program you are debugging with
7586 @value{GDBN}.
7587
7588 To use this interface, use the command @kbd{M-x gdb} in Emacs. Give the
7589 executable file you want to debug as an argument. This command starts
7590 @value{GDBN} as a subprocess of Emacs, with input and output through a newly
7591 created Emacs buffer.
7592
7593 Using @value{GDBN} under Emacs is just like using @value{GDBN} normally except for two
7594 things:
7595
7596 @itemize @bullet
7597 @item
7598 All ``terminal'' input and output goes through the Emacs buffer.
7599 @end itemize
7600
7601 This applies both to @value{GDBN} commands and their output, and to the input
7602 and output done by the program you are debugging.
7603
7604 This is useful because it means that you can copy the text of previous
7605 commands and input them again; you can even use parts of the output
7606 in this way.
7607
7608 All the facilities of Emacs' Shell mode are available for interacting
7609 with your program. In particular, you can send signals the usual
7610 way---for example, @kbd{C-c C-c} for an interrupt, @kbd{C-c C-z} for a
7611 stop.
7612
7613 @itemize @bullet
7614 @item
7615 @value{GDBN} displays source code through Emacs.
7616 @end itemize
7617
7618 Each time @value{GDBN} displays a stack frame, Emacs automatically finds the
7619 source file for that frame and puts an arrow (@samp{=>}) at the
7620 left margin of the current line. Emacs uses a separate buffer for
7621 source display, and splits the screen to show both your @value{GDBN} session
7622 and the source.
7623
7624 Explicit @value{GDBN} @code{list} or search commands still produce output as
7625 usual, but you probably will have no reason to use them.
7626
7627 @quotation
7628 @emph{Warning:} If the directory where your program resides is not your
7629 current directory, it can be easy to confuse Emacs about the location of
7630 the source files, in which case the auxiliary display buffer will not
7631 appear to show your source. @value{GDBN} can find programs by searching your
7632 environment's @code{PATH} variable, so the @value{GDBN} input and output
7633 session will proceed normally; but Emacs does not get enough information
7634 back from @value{GDBN} to locate the source files in this situation. To
7635 avoid this problem, either start @value{GDBN} mode from the directory where
7636 your program resides, or specify a full path name when prompted for the
7637 @kbd{M-x gdb} argument.
7638
7639 A similar confusion can result if you use the @value{GDBN} @code{file} command to
7640 switch to debugging a program in some other location, from an existing
7641 @value{GDBN} buffer in Emacs.
7642 @end quotation
7643
7644 By default, @kbd{M-x gdb} calls the program called @file{gdb}. If
7645 you need to call @value{GDBN} by a different name (for example, if you keep
7646 several configurations around, with different names) you can set the
7647 Emacs variable @code{gdb-command-name}; for example,
7648
7649 @example
7650 (setq gdb-command-name "mygdb")
7651 @end example
7652
7653 @noindent
7654 (preceded by @kbd{ESC ESC}, or typed in the @code{*scratch*} buffer, or
7655 in your @file{.emacs} file) will make Emacs call the program named
7656 ``@code{mygdb}'' instead.
7657
7658 In the @value{GDBN} I/O buffer, you can use these special Emacs commands in
7659 addition to the standard Shell mode commands:
7660
7661 @table @kbd
7662 @item C-h m
7663 Describe the features of Emacs' @value{GDBN} Mode.
7664
7665 @item M-s
7666 Execute to another source line, like the @value{GDBN} @code{step} command; also
7667 update the display window to show the current file and location.
7668
7669 @item M-n
7670 Execute to next source line in this function, skipping all function
7671 calls, like the @value{GDBN} @code{next} command. Then update the display window
7672 to show the current file and location.
7673
7674 @item M-i
7675 Execute one instruction, like the @value{GDBN} @code{stepi} command; update
7676 display window accordingly.
7677
7678 @item M-x gdb-nexti
7679 Execute to next instruction, using the @value{GDBN} @code{nexti} command; update
7680 display window accordingly.
7681
7682 @item C-c C-f
7683 Execute until exit from the selected stack frame, like the @value{GDBN}
7684 @code{finish} command.
7685
7686 @item M-c
7687 Continue execution of your program, like the @value{GDBN} @code{continue}
7688 command.
7689
7690 @emph{Warning:} In Emacs v19, this command is @kbd{C-c C-p}.
7691
7692 @item M-u
7693 Go up the number of frames indicated by the numeric argument
7694 (@pxref{Arguments, , Numeric Arguments, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}),
7695 like the @value{GDBN} @code{up} command.
7696
7697 @emph{Warning:} In Emacs v19, this command is @kbd{C-c C-u}.
7698
7699 @item M-d
7700 Go down the number of frames indicated by the numeric argument, like the
7701 @value{GDBN} @code{down} command.
7702
7703 @emph{Warning:} In Emacs v19, this command is @kbd{C-c C-d}.
7704
7705 @item C-x &
7706 Read the number where the cursor is positioned, and insert it at the end
7707 of the @value{GDBN} I/O buffer. For example, if you wish to disassemble code
7708 around an address that was displayed earlier, type @kbd{disassemble};
7709 then move the cursor to the address display, and pick up the
7710 argument for @code{disassemble} by typing @kbd{C-x &}.
7711
7712 You can customize this further by defining elements of the list
7713 @code{gdb-print-command}; once it is defined, you can format or
7714 otherwise process numbers picked up by @kbd{C-x &} before they are
7715 inserted. A numeric argument to @kbd{C-x &} will both indicate that you
7716 wish special formatting, and act as an index to pick an element of the
7717 list. If the list element is a string, the number to be inserted is
7718 formatted using the Emacs function @code{format}; otherwise the number
7719 is passed as an argument to the corresponding list element.
7720 @end table
7721
7722 In any source file, the Emacs command @kbd{C-x SPC} (@code{gdb-break})
7723 tells @value{GDBN} to set a breakpoint on the source line point is on.
7724
7725 If you accidentally delete the source-display buffer, an easy way to get
7726 it back is to type the command @code{f} in the @value{GDBN} buffer, to
7727 request a frame display; when you run under Emacs, this will recreate
7728 the source buffer if necessary to show you the context of the current
7729 frame.
7730
7731 The source files displayed in Emacs are in ordinary Emacs buffers
7732 which are visiting the source files in the usual way. You can edit
7733 the files with these buffers if you wish; but keep in mind that @value{GDBN}
7734 communicates with Emacs in terms of line numbers. If you add or
7735 delete lines from the text, the line numbers that @value{GDBN} knows will cease
7736 to correspond properly with the code.
7737
7738 @c The following dropped because Epoch is nonstandard. Reactivate
7739 @c if/when v19 does something similar. ---pesch@cygnus.com 19dec1990
7740 @ignore
7741 @kindex emacs epoch environment
7742 @kindex epoch
7743 @kindex inspect
7744
7745 Version 18 of Emacs has a built-in window system called the @code{epoch}
7746 environment. Users of this environment can use a new command,
7747 @code{inspect} which performs identically to @code{print} except that
7748 each value is printed in its own window.
7749 @end ignore
7750 @end ifclear
7751
7752 @ifset LUCID
7753 @node Energize
7754 @chapter Using @value{GDBN} with Energize
7755
7756 @cindex Energize
7757 The Energize Programming System is an integrated development environment
7758 that includes a point-and-click interface to many programming tools.
7759 When you use @value{GDBN} in this environment, you can use the standard
7760 Energize graphical interface to drive @value{GDBN}; you can also, if you
7761 choose, type @value{GDBN} commands as usual in a debugging window. Even if
7762 you use the graphical interface, the debugging window (which uses Emacs,
7763 and resembles the standard Emacs interface to @value{GDBN}) displays the
7764 equivalent commands, so that the history of your debugging session is
7765 properly reflected.
7766
7767 When Energize starts up a @value{GDBN} session, it uses one of the
7768 command-line options @samp{-energize} or @samp{-cadillac} (``cadillac''
7769 is the name of the communications protocol used by the Energize system).
7770 This option makes @value{GDBN} run as one of the tools in the Energize Tool
7771 Set: it sends all output to the Energize kernel, and accept input from
7772 it as well.
7773
7774 See the user manual for the Energize Programming System for
7775 information on how to use the Energize graphical interface and the other
7776 development tools that Energize integrates with @value{GDBN}.
7777
7778 @end ifset
7779
7780 @node GDB Bugs
7781 @chapter Reporting Bugs in @value{GDBN}
7782 @cindex bugs in @value{GDBN}
7783 @cindex reporting bugs in @value{GDBN}
7784
7785 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @value{GDBN} reliable.
7786
7787 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it
7788 may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help
7789 the entire community by making the next version of @value{GDBN} work better. Bug
7790 reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @value{GDBN}.
7791
7792 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7793 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7794
7795 @menu
7796 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7797 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7798 @end menu
7799
7800 @node Bug Criteria
7801 @section Have you found a bug?
7802 @cindex bug criteria
7803
7804 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7805
7806 @itemize @bullet
7807 @item
7808 @cindex fatal signal
7809 @cindex debugger crash
7810 @cindex crash of debugger
7811 If the debugger gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7812 @value{GDBN} bug. Reliable debuggers never crash.
7813
7814 @item
7815 @cindex error on valid input
7816 If @value{GDBN} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7817
7818 @item
7819 @cindex invalid input
7820 If @value{GDBN} does not produce an error message for invalid input,
7821 that is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of
7822 ``invalid input'' might be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support
7823 for traditional practice''.
7824
7825 @item
7826 If you are an experienced user of debugging tools, your suggestions
7827 for improvement of @value{GDBN} are welcome in any case.
7828 @end itemize
7829
7830 @node Bug Reporting
7831 @section How to report bugs
7832 @cindex bug reports
7833 @cindex @value{GDBN} bugs, reporting
7834
7835 A number of companies and individuals offer support for GNU products.
7836 If you obtained @value{GDBN} from a support organization, we recommend you
7837 contact that organization first.
7838
7839 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7840 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the GNU Emacs
7841 distribution.
7842
7843 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @value{GDBN} to one
7844 of these addresses:
7845
7846 @example
7847 bug-gdb@@prep.ai.mit.edu
7848 @{ucbvax|mit-eddie|uunet@}!prep.ai.mit.edu!bug-gdb
7849 @end example
7850
7851 @strong{Do not send bug reports to @samp{info-gdb}, or to
7852 @samp{help-gdb}, or to any newsgroups.} Most users of @value{GDBN} do not want to
7853 receive bug reports. Those that do, have arranged to receive @samp{bug-gdb}.
7854
7855 The mailing list @samp{bug-gdb} has a newsgroup @samp{gnu.gdb.bug} which
7856 serves as a repeater. The mailing list and the newsgroup carry exactly
7857 the same messages. Often people think of posting bug reports to the
7858 newsgroup instead of mailing them. This appears to work, but it has one
7859 problem which can be crucial: a newsgroup posting often lacks a mail
7860 path back to the sender. Thus, if we need to ask for more information,
7861 we may be unable to reach you. For this reason, it is better to send
7862 bug reports to the mailing list.
7863
7864 As a last resort, send bug reports on paper to:
7865
7866 @example
7867 GNU Debugger Bugs
7868 Free Software Foundation
7869 545 Tech Square
7870 Cambridge, MA 02139
7871 @end example
7872
7873 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7874 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7875 fact or leave it out, state it!
7876
7877 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7878 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
7879 assume that the name of the variable you use in an example does not matter.
7880 Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a
7881 stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the location where that
7882 name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name were different, the contents
7883 of that location would fool the debugger into doing the right thing despite
7884 the bug. Play it safe and give a specific, complete example. That is the
7885 easiest thing for you to do, and the most helpful.
7886
7887 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7888 the bug if it is new to us. It is not as important as what happens if
7889 the bug is already known. Therefore, always write your bug reports on
7890 the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
7891
7892 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7893 bell?'' Those bug reports are useless, and we urge everyone to
7894 @emph{refuse to respond to them} except to chide the sender to report
7895 bugs properly.
7896
7897 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7898
7899 @itemize @bullet
7900 @item
7901 The version of @value{GDBN}. @value{GDBN} announces it if you start with no
7902 arguments; you can also print it at any time using @code{show version}.
7903
7904 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7905 the bug in the current version of @value{GDBN}.
7906
7907 @item
7908 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7909 version number.
7910
7911 @item
7912 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @value{GDBN}---e.g.
7913 ``@value{GCC}--2.0''.
7914
7915 @item
7916 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile the program you
7917 are debugging---e.g. ``@value{GCC}--2.0''.
7918
7919 @item
7920 The command arguments you gave the compiler to compile your example and
7921 observe the bug. For example, did you use @samp{-O}? To guarantee
7922 you will not omit something important, list them all. A copy of the
7923 Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
7924
7925 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7926 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7927
7928 @item
7929 A complete input script, and all necessary source files, that will
7930 reproduce the bug.
7931
7932 @item
7933 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7934 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7935
7936 Of course, if the bug is that @value{GDBN} gets a fatal signal, then we will
7937 certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
7938 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. We are human, after all. You
7939 might as well not give us a chance to make a mistake.
7940
7941 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7942 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as,
7943 your copy of @value{GDBN} is out of synch, or you have encountered a
7944 bug in the C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy
7945 might crash and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash,
7946 then when ours fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not
7947 happening for us. If you had not told us to expect a crash, then we
7948 would not be able to draw any conclusion from our observations.
7949
7950 @item
7951 If you wish to suggest changes to the @value{GDBN} source, send us context
7952 diffs. If you even discuss something in the @value{GDBN} source, refer to
7953 it by context, not by line number.
7954
7955 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7956 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7957 @end itemize
7958
7959 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7960
7961 @itemize @bullet
7962 @item
7963 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7964
7965 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7966 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7967 changes will not affect it.
7968
7969 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7970 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7971 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7972 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7973
7974 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7975 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7976 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7977 less time, etc.
7978
7979 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7980 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7981
7982 @item
7983 A patch for the bug.
7984
7985 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7986 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7987 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7988 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7989
7990 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @value{GDBN} it is very hard to
7991 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7992 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able
7993 to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
7994
7995 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7996 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7997 help us to understand.
7998
7999 @item
8000 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8001
8002 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8003 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8004 @end itemize
8005
8006 @c The readline documentation is distributed with the readline code
8007 @c and consists of the two following files:
8008 @c rluser.texinfo
8009 @c inc-hist.texi
8010 @c Use -I with makeinfo to point to the appropriate directory,
8011 @c environment var TEXINPUTS with TeX.
8012 @include rluser.texinfo
8013 @include inc-hist.texi
8014
8015 @ifset NOVEL
8016 @node Renamed Commands
8017 @appendix Renamed Commands
8018
8019 The following commands were renamed in GDB 4, in order to make the
8020 command set as a whole more consistent and easier to use and remember:
8021
8022 @kindex add-syms
8023 @kindex delete environment
8024 @kindex info copying
8025 @kindex info convenience
8026 @kindex info directories
8027 @kindex info editing
8028 @kindex info history
8029 @kindex info targets
8030 @kindex info values
8031 @kindex info version
8032 @kindex info warranty
8033 @kindex set addressprint
8034 @kindex set arrayprint
8035 @kindex set prettyprint
8036 @kindex set screen-height
8037 @kindex set screen-width
8038 @kindex set unionprint
8039 @kindex set vtblprint
8040 @kindex set demangle
8041 @kindex set asm-demangle
8042 @kindex set sevenbit-strings
8043 @kindex set array-max
8044 @kindex set caution
8045 @kindex set history write
8046 @kindex show addressprint
8047 @kindex show arrayprint
8048 @kindex show prettyprint
8049 @kindex show screen-height
8050 @kindex show screen-width
8051 @kindex show unionprint
8052 @kindex show vtblprint
8053 @kindex show demangle
8054 @kindex show asm-demangle
8055 @kindex show sevenbit-strings
8056 @kindex show array-max
8057 @kindex show caution
8058 @kindex show history write
8059 @kindex unset
8060
8061 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8062 @ifinfo
8063 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8064 @example
8065 OLD COMMAND NEW COMMAND
8066 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8067 --------------- -------------------------------
8068 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8069 add-syms add-symbol-file
8070 delete environment unset environment
8071 info convenience show convenience
8072 info copying show copying
8073 info directories show directories
8074 info editing show commands
8075 info history show values
8076 info targets help target
8077 info values show values
8078 info version show version
8079 info warranty show warranty
8080 set/show addressprint set/show print address
8081 set/show array-max set/show print elements
8082 set/show arrayprint set/show print array
8083 set/show asm-demangle set/show print asm-demangle
8084 set/show caution set/show confirm
8085 set/show demangle set/show print demangle
8086 set/show history write set/show history save
8087 set/show prettyprint set/show print pretty
8088 set/show screen-height set/show height
8089 set/show screen-width set/show width
8090 set/show sevenbit-strings set/show print sevenbit-strings
8091 set/show unionprint set/show print union
8092 set/show vtblprint set/show print vtbl
8093
8094 unset [No longer an alias for delete]
8095 @end example
8096 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8097 @end ifinfo
8098
8099 @tex
8100 \vskip \parskip\vskip \baselineskip
8101 \halign{\tt #\hfil &\qquad#&\tt #\hfil\cr
8102 {\bf Old Command} &&{\bf New Command}\cr
8103 add-syms &&add-symbol-file\cr
8104 delete environment &&unset environment\cr
8105 info convenience &&show convenience\cr
8106 info copying &&show copying\cr
8107 info directories &&show directories \cr
8108 info editing &&show commands\cr
8109 info history &&show values\cr
8110 info targets &&help target\cr
8111 info values &&show values\cr
8112 info version &&show version\cr
8113 info warranty &&show warranty\cr
8114 set{\rm / }show addressprint &&set{\rm / }show print address\cr
8115 set{\rm / }show array-max &&set{\rm / }show print elements\cr
8116 set{\rm / }show arrayprint &&set{\rm / }show print array\cr
8117 set{\rm / }show asm-demangle &&set{\rm / }show print asm-demangle\cr
8118 set{\rm / }show caution &&set{\rm / }show confirm\cr
8119 set{\rm / }show demangle &&set{\rm / }show print demangle\cr
8120 set{\rm / }show history write &&set{\rm / }show history save\cr
8121 set{\rm / }show prettyprint &&set{\rm / }show print pretty\cr
8122 set{\rm / }show screen-height &&set{\rm / }show height\cr
8123 set{\rm / }show screen-width &&set{\rm / }show width\cr
8124 set{\rm / }show sevenbit-strings &&set{\rm / }show print sevenbit-strings\cr
8125 set{\rm / }show unionprint &&set{\rm / }show print union\cr
8126 set{\rm / }show vtblprint &&set{\rm / }show print vtbl\cr
8127 \cr
8128 unset &&\rm(No longer an alias for delete)\cr
8129 }
8130 @end tex
8131 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8132 @end ifset
8133
8134 @ifclear PRECONFIGURED
8135 @node Formatting Documentation
8136 @appendix Formatting Documentation
8137
8138 @cindex GDB reference card
8139 @cindex reference card
8140 The GDB 4 release includes an already-formatted reference card, ready
8141 for printing with PostScript or GhostScript, in the @file{gdb}
8142 subdirectory of the main source directory@footnote{In
8143 @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb/refcard.ps} of the version @value{GDBVN}
8144 release.}. If you can use PostScript or GhostScript with your printer,
8145 you can print the reference card immediately with @file{refcard.ps}.
8146
8147 The release also includes the source for the reference card. You
8148 can format it, using @TeX{}, by typing:
8149
8150 @example
8151 make refcard.dvi
8152 @end example
8153
8154 The GDB reference card is designed to print in landscape mode on US
8155 ``letter'' size paper; that is, on a sheet 11 inches wide by 8.5 inches
8156 high. You will need to specify this form of printing as an option to
8157 your @sc{dvi} output program.
8158
8159 @cindex documentation
8160
8161 All the documentation for GDB comes as part of the machine-readable
8162 distribution. The documentation is written in Texinfo format, which is
8163 a documentation system that uses a single source file to produce both
8164 on-line information and a printed manual. You can use one of the Info
8165 formatting commands to create the on-line version of the documentation
8166 and @TeX{} (or @code{texi2roff}) to typeset the printed version.
8167
8168 GDB includes an already formatted copy of the on-line Info version of
8169 this manual in the @file{gdb} subdirectory. The main Info file is
8170 @file{gdb-@var{version-number}/gdb/gdb.info}, and it refers to
8171 subordinate files matching @samp{gdb.info*} in the same directory. If
8172 necessary, you can print out these files, or read them with any editor;
8173 but they are easier to read using the @code{info} subsystem in GNU Emacs
8174 or the standalone @code{info} program, available as part of the GNU
8175 Texinfo distribution.
8176
8177 If you want to format these Info files yourself, you need one of the
8178 Info formatting programs, such as @code{texinfo-format-buffer} or
8179 @code{makeinfo}.
8180
8181 If you have @code{makeinfo} installed, and are in the top level GDB
8182 source directory (@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}}, in the case of version @value{GDBVN}), you can
8183 make the Info file by typing:
8184
8185 @example
8186 cd gdb
8187 make gdb.info
8188 @end example
8189
8190 If you want to typeset and print copies of this manual, you need @TeX{},
8191 a program to print its @sc{dvi} output files, and @file{texinfo.tex}, the
8192 Texinfo definitions file.
8193
8194 @TeX{} is a typesetting program; it does not print files directly, but
8195 produces output files called @sc{dvi} files. To print a typeset
8196 document, you need a program to print @sc{dvi} files. If your system
8197 has @TeX{} installed, chances are it has such a program. The precise
8198 command to use depends on your system; @kbd{lpr -d} is common; another
8199 (for PostScript devices) is @kbd{dvips}. The @sc{dvi} print command may
8200 require a file name without any extension or a @samp{.dvi} extension.
8201
8202 @TeX{} also requires a macro definitions file called
8203 @file{texinfo.tex}. This file tells @TeX{} how to typeset a document
8204 written in Texinfo format. On its own, @TeX{} cannot read, much less
8205 typeset a Texinfo file. @file{texinfo.tex} is distributed with GDB
8206 and is located in the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}/texinfo}
8207 directory.
8208
8209 If you have @TeX{} and a @sc{dvi} printer program installed, you can
8210 typeset and print this manual. First switch to the the @file{gdb}
8211 subdirectory of the main source directory (for example, to
8212 @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb}) and then type:
8213
8214 @example
8215 make gdb.dvi
8216 @end example
8217
8218 @node Installing GDB
8219 @appendix Installing GDB
8220 @cindex configuring GDB
8221 @cindex installation
8222
8223 GDB comes with a @code{configure} script that automates the process
8224 of preparing GDB for installation; you can then use @code{make} to
8225 build the @code{gdb} program.
8226 @iftex
8227 @c irrelevant in info file; it's as current as the code it lives with.
8228 @footnote{If you have a more recent version of GDB than @value{GDBVN},
8229 look at the @file{README} file in the sources; we may have improved the
8230 installation procedures since publishing this manual.}
8231 @end iftex
8232
8233 The GDB distribution includes all the source code you need for GDB in
8234 a single directory, whose name is usually composed by appending the
8235 version number to @samp{gdb}.
8236
8237 For example, the GDB version @value{GDBVN} distribution is in the
8238 @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} directory. That directory contains:
8239
8240 @table @code
8241 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/configure @r{(and supporting files)}
8242 script for configuring GDB and all its supporting libraries.
8243
8244 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb
8245 the source specific to GDB itself
8246
8247 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/bfd
8248 source for the Binary File Descriptor library
8249
8250 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/include
8251 GNU include files
8252
8253 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/libiberty
8254 source for the @samp{-liberty} free software library
8255
8256 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/opcodes
8257 source for the library of opcode tables and disassemblers
8258
8259 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/readline
8260 source for the GNU command-line interface
8261
8262 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/glob
8263 source for the GNU filename pattern-matching subroutine
8264
8265 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/mmalloc
8266 source for the GNU memory-mapped malloc package
8267 @end table
8268
8269 The simplest way to configure and build GDB is to run @code{configure}
8270 from the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}} source directory, which in
8271 this example is the @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} directory.
8272
8273 First switch to the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}} source directory
8274 if you are not already in it; then run @code{configure}. Pass the
8275 identifier for the platform on which GDB will run as an
8276 argument.
8277
8278 For example:
8279
8280 @example
8281 cd gdb-@value{GDBVN}
8282 ./configure @var{host}
8283 make
8284 @end example
8285
8286 @noindent
8287 where @var{host} is an identifier such as @samp{sun4} or
8288 @samp{decstation}, that identifies the platform where GDB will run.
8289
8290 Running @samp{configure @var{host}} and then running @code{make} builds the
8291 @file{bfd}, @file{readline}, @file{mmalloc}, and @file{libiberty}
8292 libraries, then @code{gdb} itself. The configured source files, and the
8293 binaries, are left in the corresponding source directories.
8294
8295 @code{configure} is a Bourne-shell (@code{/bin/sh}) script; if your
8296 system does not recognize this automatically when you run a different
8297 shell, you may need to run @code{sh} on it explicitly:
8298
8299 @example
8300 sh configure @var{host}
8301 @end example
8302
8303 If you run @code{configure} from a directory that contains source
8304 directories for multiple libraries or programs, such as the
8305 @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} source directory for version @value{GDBVN}, @code{configure}
8306 creates configuration files for every directory level underneath (unless
8307 you tell it not to, with the @samp{--norecursion} option).
8308
8309 You can run the @code{configure} script from any of the
8310 subordinate directories in the GDB distribution, if you only want to
8311 configure that subdirectory; but be sure to specify a path to it.
8312
8313 For example, with version @value{GDBVN}, type the following to configure only
8314 the @code{bfd} subdirectory:
8315
8316 @example
8317 @group
8318 cd gdb-@value{GDBVN}/bfd
8319 ../configure @var{host}
8320 @end group
8321 @end example
8322
8323 You can install @code{@value{GDBP}} anywhere; it has no hardwired paths.
8324 However, you should make sure that the shell on your path (named by
8325 the @samp{SHELL} environment variable) is publicly readable. Remember
8326 that GDB uses the shell to start your program---some systems refuse to
8327 let GDB debug child processes whose programs are not readable.
8328
8329 @menu
8330 * Separate Objdir:: Compiling GDB in another directory
8331 * Config Names:: Specifying names for hosts and targets
8332 * configure Options:: Summary of options for configure
8333 @end menu
8334
8335 @node Separate Objdir
8336 @section Compiling GDB in another directory
8337
8338 If you want to run GDB versions for several host or target machines,
8339 you need a different @code{gdb} compiled for each combination of
8340 host and target. @code{configure} is designed to make this easy by
8341 allowing you to generate each configuration in a separate subdirectory,
8342 rather than in the source directory. If your @code{make} program
8343 handles the @samp{VPATH} feature (GNU @code{make} does), running
8344 @code{make} in each of these directories builds the @code{gdb}
8345 program specified there.
8346
8347 To build @code{gdb} in a separate directory, run @code{configure}
8348 with the @samp{--srcdir} option to specify where to find the source.
8349 (You also need to specify a path to find @code{configure}
8350 itself from your working directory. If the path to @code{configure}
8351 would be the same as the argument to @samp{--srcdir}, you can leave out
8352 the @samp{--srcdir} option; it will be assumed.)
8353
8354 For example, with version @value{GDBVN}, you can build GDB in a separate
8355 directory for a Sun 4 like this:
8356
8357 @example
8358 @group
8359 cd gdb-@value{GDBVN}
8360 mkdir ../gdb-sun4
8361 cd ../gdb-sun4
8362 ../gdb-@value{GDBVN}/configure sun4
8363 make
8364 @end group
8365 @end example
8366
8367 When @code{configure} builds a configuration using a remote source
8368 directory, it creates a tree for the binaries with the same structure
8369 (and using the same names) as the tree under the source directory. In
8370 the example, you'd find the Sun 4 library @file{libiberty.a} in the
8371 directory @file{gdb-sun4/libiberty}, and GDB itself in
8372 @file{gdb-sun4/gdb}.
8373
8374 One popular reason to build several GDB configurations in separate
8375 directories is to configure GDB for cross-compiling (where GDB
8376 runs on one machine---the host---while debugging programs that run on
8377 another machine---the target). You specify a cross-debugging target by
8378 giving the @samp{--target=@var{target}} option to @code{configure}.
8379
8380 When you run @code{make} to build a program or library, you must run
8381 it in a configured directory---whatever directory you were in when you
8382 called @code{configure} (or one of its subdirectories).
8383
8384 The @code{Makefile} that @code{configure} generates in each source
8385 directory also runs recursively. If you type @code{make} in a source
8386 directory such as @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} (or in a separate configured
8387 directory configured with @samp{--srcdir=@var{path}/gdb-@value{GDBVN}}), you
8388 will build all the required libraries, and then build GDB.
8389
8390 When you have multiple hosts or targets configured in separate
8391 directories, you can run @code{make} on them in parallel (for example,
8392 if they are NFS-mounted on each of the hosts); they will not interfere
8393 with each other.
8394
8395 @node Config Names
8396 @section Specifying names for hosts and targets
8397
8398 The specifications used for hosts and targets in the @code{configure}
8399 script are based on a three-part naming scheme, but some short predefined
8400 aliases are also supported. The full naming scheme encodes three pieces
8401 of information in the following pattern:
8402
8403 @example
8404 @var{architecture}-@var{vendor}-@var{os}
8405 @end example
8406
8407 For example, you can use the alias @code{sun4} as a @var{host} argument,
8408 or as the value for @var{target} in a @code{--target=@var{target}}
8409 option. The equivalent full name is @samp{sparc-sun-sunos4}.
8410
8411 The @code{configure} script accompanying GDB does not provide
8412 any query facility to list all supported host and target names or
8413 aliases. @code{configure} calls the Bourne shell script
8414 @code{config.sub} to map abbreviations to full names; you can read the
8415 script, if you wish, or you can use it to test your guesses on
8416 abbreviations---for example:
8417
8418 @smallexample
8419 % sh config.sub sun4
8420 sparc-sun-sunos411
8421 % sh config.sub sun3
8422 m68k-sun-sunos411
8423 % sh config.sub decstation
8424 mips-dec-ultrix42
8425 % sh config.sub hp300bsd
8426 m68k-hp-bsd
8427 % sh config.sub i386v
8428 i386-unknown-sysv
8429 % sh config.sub i786v
8430 Invalid configuration `i786v': machine `i786v' not recognized
8431 @end smallexample
8432
8433 @noindent
8434 @code{config.sub} is also distributed in the GDB source
8435 directory (@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}}, for version @value{GDBVN}).
8436
8437 @node configure Options
8438 @section @code{configure} options
8439
8440 Here is a summary of the @code{configure} options and arguments that
8441 are most often useful for building @value{GDBN}. @code{configure} also has
8442 several other options not listed here. @inforef{What Configure
8443 Does,,configure.info}, for a full explanation of @code{configure}.
8444 @c FIXME: Would this be more, or less, useful as an xref (ref to printed
8445 @c manual in the printed manual, ref to info file only from the info file)?
8446
8447 @example
8448 configure @r{[}--help@r{]}
8449 @r{[}--prefix=@var{dir}@r{]}
8450 @r{[}--srcdir=@var{path}@r{]}
8451 @r{[}--norecursion@r{]} @r{[}--rm@r{]}
8452 @r{[}--target=@var{target}@r{]} @var{host}
8453 @end example
8454
8455 @noindent
8456 You may introduce options with a single @samp{-} rather than
8457 @samp{--} if you prefer; but you may abbreviate option names if you use
8458 @samp{--}.
8459
8460 @table @code
8461 @item --help
8462 Display a quick summary of how to invoke @code{configure}.
8463
8464 @item -prefix=@var{dir}
8465 Configure the source to install programs and files under directory
8466 @file{@var{dir}}.
8467
8468 @item --srcdir=@var{path}
8469 @strong{Warning: using this option requires GNU @code{make}, or another
8470 @code{make} that implements the @code{VPATH} feature.}@*
8471 Use this option to make configurations in directories separate from the
8472 GDB source directories. Among other things, you can use this to
8473 build (or maintain) several configurations simultaneously, in separate
8474 directories. @code{configure} writes configuration specific files in
8475 the current directory, but arranges for them to use the source in the
8476 directory @var{path}. @code{configure} will create directories under
8477 the working directory in parallel to the source directories below
8478 @var{path}.
8479
8480 @item --norecursion
8481 Configure only the directory level where @code{configure} is executed; do not
8482 propagate configuration to subdirectories.
8483
8484 @item --rm
8485 Remove the configuration that the other arguments specify.
8486
8487 @c This does not work (yet if ever). FIXME.
8488 @c @item --parse=@var{lang} @dots{}
8489 @c Configure the GDB expression parser to parse the listed languages.
8490 @c @samp{all} configures GDB for all supported languages. To get a
8491 @c list of all supported languages, omit the argument. Without this
8492 @c option, GDB is configured to parse all supported languages.
8493
8494 @item --target=@var{target}
8495 Configure GDB for cross-debugging programs running on the specified
8496 @var{target}. Without this option, GDB is configured to debug
8497 programs that run on the same machine (@var{host}) as GDB itself.
8498
8499 There is no convenient way to generate a list of all available targets.
8500
8501 @item @var{host} @dots{}
8502 Configure GDB to run on the specified @var{host}.
8503
8504 There is no convenient way to generate a list of all available hosts.
8505 @end table
8506
8507 @noindent
8508 @code{configure} accepts other options, for compatibility with
8509 configuring other GNU tools recursively; but these are the only
8510 options that affect GDB or its supporting libraries.
8511 @end ifclear
8512
8513 @ifclear AGGLOMERATION
8514 @node Copying
8515 @unnumbered GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
8516 @center Version 2, June 1991
8517
8518 @display
8519 Copyright @copyright{} 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
8520 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA
8521
8522 Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
8523 of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
8524 @end display
8525
8526 @unnumberedsec Preamble
8527
8528 The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
8529 freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
8530 License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
8531 software---to make sure the software is free for all its users. This
8532 General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
8533 Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
8534 using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
8535 the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to
8536 your programs, too.
8537
8538 When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
8539 price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
8540 have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
8541 this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
8542 if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
8543 in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
8544
8545 To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
8546 anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
8547 These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
8548 distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
8549
8550 For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
8551 gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
8552 you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
8553 source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their
8554 rights.
8555
8556 We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
8557 (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
8558 distribute and/or modify the software.
8559
8560 Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
8561 that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
8562 software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
8563 want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
8564 that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
8565 authors' reputations.
8566
8567 Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
8568 patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
8569 program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
8570 program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
8571 patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
8572
8573 The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
8574 modification follow.
8575
8576 @iftex
8577 @unnumberedsec TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
8578 @end iftex
8579 @ifinfo
8580 @center TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
8581 @end ifinfo
8582
8583 @enumerate
8584 @item
8585 This License applies to any program or other work which contains
8586 a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
8587 under the terms of this General Public License. The ``Program'', below,
8588 refers to any such program or work, and a ``work based on the Program''
8589 means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
8590 that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
8591 either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
8592 language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
8593 the term ``modification''.) Each licensee is addressed as ``you''.
8594
8595 Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
8596 covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
8597 running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
8598 is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
8599 Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
8600 Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
8601
8602 @item
8603 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
8604 source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
8605 conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
8606 copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
8607 notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
8608 and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
8609 along with the Program.
8610
8611 You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
8612 you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
8613
8614 @item
8615 You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
8616 of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
8617 distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
8618 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
8619
8620 @enumerate a
8621 @item
8622 You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
8623 stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
8624
8625 @item
8626 You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
8627 whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
8628 part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
8629 parties under the terms of this License.
8630
8631 @item
8632 If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
8633 when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
8634 interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
8635 announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
8636 notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
8637 a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
8638 these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
8639 License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
8640 does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
8641 the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
8642 @end enumerate
8643
8644 These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
8645 identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
8646 and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
8647 themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
8648 sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
8649 distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
8650 on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
8651 this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
8652 entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
8653
8654 Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
8655 your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
8656 exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
8657 collective works based on the Program.
8658
8659 In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
8660 with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
8661 a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
8662 the scope of this License.
8663
8664 @item
8665 You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
8666 under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
8667 Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
8668
8669 @enumerate a
8670 @item
8671 Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
8672 source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
8673 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
8674
8675 @item
8676 Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
8677 years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
8678 cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
8679 machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
8680 distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
8681 customarily used for software interchange; or,
8682
8683 @item
8684 Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
8685 to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is
8686 allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
8687 received the program in object code or executable form with such
8688 an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
8689 @end enumerate
8690
8691 The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
8692 making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source
8693 code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
8694 associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
8695 control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a
8696 special exception, the source code distributed need not include
8697 anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
8698 form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
8699 operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
8700 itself accompanies the executable.
8701
8702 If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
8703 access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
8704 access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
8705 distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
8706 compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
8707
8708 @item
8709 You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
8710 except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
8711 otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
8712 void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
8713 However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
8714 this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
8715 parties remain in full compliance.
8716
8717 @item
8718 You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
8719 signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
8720 distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
8721 prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
8722 modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
8723 Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
8724 all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
8725 the Program or works based on it.
8726
8727 @item
8728 Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
8729 Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
8730 original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
8731 these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
8732 restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
8733 You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
8734 this License.
8735
8736 @item
8737 If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
8738 infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
8739 conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
8740 otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
8741 excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
8742 distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
8743 License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
8744 may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent
8745 license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
8746 all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
8747 the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
8748 refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
8749
8750 If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
8751 any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
8752 apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
8753 circumstances.
8754
8755 It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
8756 patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
8757 such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
8758 integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
8759 implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
8760 generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
8761 through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
8762 system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
8763 to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
8764 impose that choice.
8765
8766 This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
8767 be a consequence of the rest of this License.
8768
8769 @item
8770 If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
8771 certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
8772 original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
8773 may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
8774 those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
8775 countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates
8776 the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
8777
8778 @item
8779 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
8780 of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will
8781 be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
8782 address new problems or concerns.
8783
8784 Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program
8785 specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and ``any
8786 later version'', you have the option of following the terms and conditions
8787 either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
8788 Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of
8789 this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
8790 Foundation.
8791
8792 @item
8793 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
8794 programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
8795 to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
8796 Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
8797 make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals
8798 of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
8799 of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
8800
8801 @iftex
8802 @heading NO WARRANTY
8803 @end iftex
8804 @ifinfo
8805 @center NO WARRANTY
8806 @end ifinfo
8807
8808 @item
8809 BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
8810 FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
8811 OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
8812 PROVIDE THE PROGRAM ``AS IS'' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
8813 OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
8814 MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
8815 TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
8816 PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
8817 REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
8818
8819 @item
8820 IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
8821 WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
8822 REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
8823 INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
8824 OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
8825 TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
8826 YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
8827 PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
8828 POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
8829 @end enumerate
8830
8831 @iftex
8832 @heading END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
8833 @end iftex
8834 @ifinfo
8835 @center END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
8836 @end ifinfo
8837
8838 @page
8839 @unnumberedsec Applying These Terms to Your New Programs
8840
8841 If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
8842 possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
8843 free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
8844
8845 To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest
8846 to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
8847 convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
8848 the ``copyright'' line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
8849
8850 @smallexample
8851 @var{one line to give the program's name and an idea of what it does.}
8852 Copyright (C) 19@var{yy} @var{name of author}
8853
8854 This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
8855 modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
8856 as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
8857 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
8858
8859 This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
8860 but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
8861 MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
8862 GNU General Public License for more details.
8863
8864 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
8865 along with this program; if not, write to the
8866 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave,
8867 Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
8868 @end smallexample
8869
8870 Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
8871
8872 If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
8873 when it starts in an interactive mode:
8874
8875 @smallexample
8876 Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19@var{yy} @var{name of author}
8877 Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details
8878 type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome
8879 to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c'
8880 for details.
8881 @end smallexample
8882
8883 The hypothetical commands @samp{show w} and @samp{show c} should show
8884 the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the
8885 commands you use may be called something other than @samp{show w} and
8886 @samp{show c}; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items---whatever
8887 suits your program.
8888
8889 You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
8890 school, if any, to sign a ``copyright disclaimer'' for the program, if
8891 necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
8892
8893 @example
8894 Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright
8895 interest in the program `Gnomovision'
8896 (which makes passes at compilers) written
8897 by James Hacker.
8898
8899 @var{signature of Ty Coon}, 1 April 1989
8900 Ty Coon, President of Vice
8901 @end example
8902
8903 This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
8904 proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may
8905 consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
8906 library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General
8907 Public License instead of this License.
8908 @end ifclear
8909
8910 @node Index
8911 @unnumbered Index
8912
8913 @printindex cp
8914
8915 @tex
8916 % I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8917 % meantime:
8918 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8919 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8920 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8921 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8922 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8923 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/},}
8924 \centerline{{\bf\fontname\tenbf}, and}
8925 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8926 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8927 \page\colophon
8928 % Blame: pesch@cygnus.com, 1991.
8929 @end tex
8930
8931 @contents
8932 @bye